Owners Manual Web Edition

VOLVO V50

DEAR VOLVO OWNER

THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo nance information contained in this owner's manual. has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements. Table of contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Instruments and controls Important information...... 10 Seatbelts...... 18 Overview, left-hand drive cars...... 48 Volvo and the environment...... 13 Airbag system...... 21 Overview, right-hand drive cars...... 50 Airbags...... 22 Driver's door control panel...... 52 Activating/deactivating the airbag*...... 24 Combined instrument panel...... 53 Side airbags (SIPS bags)...... 26 Indicator and warning symbols...... 54 Inflatable Curtain (IC)...... 28 Information display...... 58 WHIPS...... 29 Electrical socket...... 60 When the systems deploy...... 31 Lighting panel...... 62 Crash mode...... 32 Left-hand stalk switch...... 65 Child safety...... 33 Right-hand stalk switch ...... 68 Cruise control*...... 71 Keypad in the steering wheel* ...... 73 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers...... 74 00 01 Parking02 brake...... 75 Power windows...... 76 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 78 Power sunroof* ...... 82 Personal preferences...... 84 HomeLink *...... 87

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Table of contents

03 Climate control 04 Interior 05 Locks and alarm General information on climate control..... 92 Front seats...... 108 Remote control key with key blade...... 126 Manual climate control, AC...... 94 Interior lighting...... 111 Active locks...... 129 Electronic climate control, ECC*...... 97 Storage spaces in the passenger com- Keyless drive*...... 130 Air distribution...... 100 partment ...... 114 Battery in remote control key...... 133 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- Rear seat...... 118 Locking and unlocking ...... 134 senger compartment heater*...... 101 Cargo area...... 120 Child safety locks...... 137 Fuel-driven03 auxiliary heater* (diesel)...... 104 04 Alarm*05 ...... 138

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Table of contents

06 Starting and driving 07 Wheels and tyres 08 Car care General...... 144 General...... 190 Cleaning...... 206 Refuelling...... 146 Tyre pressure...... 194 Touching up paintwork...... 210 Alcoguard*...... 150 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 195 Rustproofing...... 211 Starting the engine ...... 154 Changing wheels...... 197 Starting the engine – Flexifuel...... 156 Emergency puncture repair* ...... 199 Keyless drive*...... 158 Manual gearbox...... 159 Automatic gearbox...... 160 Brake system...... 165 DSTC – Stability and traction control system* ...... 167 Park Assist*...... 169 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System . 171 Towing and recovery...... 174 Start06 assistance...... 176 07 08 Driving with a trailer...... 177 Towing equipment*...... 179 Detachable towbar* ...... 181 Loading...... 185 Adjusting headlamp pattern ...... 186

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Table of contents

09 Maintenance and service 10 Infotainment system 11 Specifications Volvo service...... 214 General...... 244 Type designation...... 278 Self-maintenance...... 215 Audio functions...... 246 Dimensions and weights...... 280 Bonnet and engine compartment...... 216 Radio functions...... 250 Engine specifications...... 283 Oils and fluids...... 218 CD functions ...... 255 Engine oil...... 284 Wiper blades...... 224 Menu structure – audio system...... 258 Fluids and lubricants...... 286 Battery...... 226 Phone functions*...... 259 Fuel...... 289 Replacing bulbs...... 228 Menu structure – phone*...... 266 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres- Fuses...... 234 Bluetooth handsfree*...... 269 sure ...... 290 Electrical system...... 292 Type approval...... 294 09 10 Symbols in 11the display...... 295

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7 Table of contents

12 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical12 Index...... 298

8 Table of contents

9 Introduction

Important information

Reading the Owner's Manual In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Introduction dealer. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- A good way of getting to know your new car is sage texts on the information display (e.g. to read the owner's manual, ideally before your Special texts AUDIO SETTINGS). first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to WARNING Decals see how best to handle the car in different sit- The car contains different types of decal which Warning texts advise of a risk of personal uations, and to make the best use of all the are designed to convey important information injury. car's features. Please pay attention to the in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the safety instructions contained in the manual. car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information. The specifications, design features and illus- IMPORTANT trations in this owner's manual are not binding. Important texts advise of a risk of material Warning for personal injury We reserve the right to make modifications damage. without prior notice. © Volvo Car Corporation NOTE Option NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- All types of option/accessory are marked with ple. an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manual Footnote also describes options (factory fitted equip- There is footnote information in the owner's ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra manual that is located at the bottom of the equipment). page. This information is an addition to the text The equipment described in the owner's man- that it refers to via a number. If the footnote ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- refers to text in a table then letters are used G031590 ferent equipment depending on adaptations instead of numbers for referral. for the needs of different markets and national Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, or local laws and regulations. Message texts white text/image on black message field. Used There are displays in the car that show text to indicate the presence of danger which, if the messages. These text messages are high-

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Introduction

Important information warning is ignored, may result in serious per- Information Procedure lists sonal injury or fatality. Procedures where action must be taken in a Risk of property damage certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual. When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant. Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move-

G031593 ment. If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-

G031592 White ISO symbols and white text/image on step instructions then the different steps are black message field. numbered with normal numbers. White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. NOTE Position lists Red circles containing a number are used Used to indicate the presence of danger which, The labels shown in the owner's manual are if the warning is ignored, may result in damage not provided as exact reproductions of in overview images where different com- to property. those in the car. The purpose is to show ponents are pointed out. The number their approximate appearance and location recurs in the position list featured in con- in the car. The information that applies to nection with the illustration that describes your car in particular is available on the label the item. in question in your car. Bulleted lists A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual. Example:

11 Introduction

Important information

• Coolant Accessories and extra equipment • Engine oil The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's To be continued electrical system. Certain accessories only This symbol is located furthest down to the function when their associated software is right when a section continues on the following installed in the car's computer system. We page. therefore recommend that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing Recording data accessories which are connected to or affect The driving and safety systems in the car use the electrical system. computers which check and share information with each other on the car's function. One or Information on the Internet more of these computers may store informa- At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- tion on the systems they check during normal mation concerning your car. driving, during the course of a collision or near- collision. Stored information may be used by: • Volvo Car Corporation • Service or repair workshops • Police or other authorities • Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.

12 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- Fuel consumption many cases the exhaust emissions are well ration's core values which influence all opera- Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption below the applicable standards. tions. We also believe that our customers share in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel our consideration for the environment. consumption generally results in lower emis- Clean air in the passenger compartment sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. A passenger compartment filter prevents dust Your Volvo complies with strict international and pollen from entering the passenger com- environmental standards and is also manufac- It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- partment via the air intake. tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- sumption. For more information read under the efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- heading, Reducing environmental impact. A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- ration has global ISO certification, which rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- includes the environmental standard ISO Efficient emission control ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- 14001 covering all factories and several of our Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- side. other units. We also set requirements for our cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that The system consists of an electronic sensor partners so that they work systematically with encompasses a clean interior environment as and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- environmental issues. well as highly efficient emission control. In tored continuously and if there is an increase in

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13 Introduction

Volvo and the environment

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as tem. We make clear demands regarding the • Always dispose of environmentally hazar- carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. way in which our workshops are designed in dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, order to prevent spills and discharges into the an environmentally safe manner. Consult a queues and tunnels for example. environment. Our workshop staff have the workshop in the event of uncertainty about knowledge and the tools required to guarantee how this type of waste should be discarded The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone good environmental care. - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon mended. filter. Reducing environmental impact Following this advice can save money, the Textile standard You can easily help reduce environmental planet's resources are saved, and the car's impact - here are a few tips: The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- durability is extended. For more information sant and comfortable, even for people with • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the and further advice, see the pages 144 and contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. engine when stationary for longer periods. 289. Extreme attention has been given to choosing Pay attention to local regulations. Recycling environmentally-compatible materials. This • Drive economically - think ahead. As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is means that they also fulfil the requirements in • Perform service and maintenance in important that the car is recycled in an envi- the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance accordance with the owner's manual's ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the towards a healthier passenger compartment instructions - follow the Service and War- car can be recycled. The last owner of the car environment. ranty Booklet's recommended intervals. is therefore requested to contact a dealer for Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- • If the car is equipped with an engine block referral to a certified/approved recycling pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the heater*, use it before starting from cold - it facility. upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning improves starting capacity and reduces and fulfils the certification requirements. wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more The owner's manual and the Volvo workshops and the environment quickly, which lowers consumption and environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions reduces emissions. The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in for a long service life and low fuel consumption • High speed increases consumption con- this publication comes from FSC certified for- for your car. In this way you contribute to a siderably due to increased wind resistance ests or other controlled sources. cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops - a doubling of speed increases wind resis- are entrusted with the service and mainte- tance 4 times. nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Introduction

Volvo and the environment

15 Seatbelts...... 18 Airbag system...... 21 Airbags...... 22 Activating/deactivating the airbag*...... 24 Side airbags (SIPS bags)...... 26 Inflatable Curtain (IC)...... 28 WHIPS...... 29 When the systems deploy...... 31 Crash mode...... 32 Child safety...... 33

16 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY 01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose. The seatbelt locks and cannot be with- WARNING drawn: Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an if it is pulled out too quickly • authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt • during braking and acceleration has been subjected to a major load, such as • if the car leans heavily. in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the Keep in mind the following seatbelt's protective properties may have do not use clips or anything else that can been lost even if the seatbelt does not • appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be G020104 prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- • ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or age. The new seatbelt must be type- tioned low down. caught on anything approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. Heavy braking can have serious consequences • the hip strap must be positioned low down if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all (not over the abdomen) passengers use their seatbelts. It is important • tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated. provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed WARNING to protect in a normal seating position. The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- Putting on a seatbelt belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by airbag in the event of a collision. pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

18 01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

Seatbelts and pregnancy such that they can easily maintain control of the Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt vehicle as they drive (which means that they reminder system. must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). They should strive to posi- Rear seat tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two ble between their abdomen and the steering subfunctions: wheel. • Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message Seatbelt reminder appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk's READ button.

G020105 • Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during a journey. This The seatbelt should always be worn during warning takes the form of a message on pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the the information display along with the correct way. The diagonal section of the seat- audio/visual signal. The warning ceases belt should wrap over the shoulder then be when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when routed between the breasts and to the side of acknowledged manually by pressing the the abdomen. READ button. The message on the information display show- The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat G018084 ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- over the thighs and as low as possible under able. Press the READ button to see stored the abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten messages. upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual and ensure that it fits as close to the body as reminder. The audio reminder is speed Certain markets possible. In addition, check that there are no dependent, and in some cases time depend- An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the twists in the seatbelt. ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At console and the combined instrument panel. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers low speed, the audio reminder will sound for should adjust their seats and steering wheel the first 6 seconds.

19 01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

Seatbelt tensioner The front seatbelts and the two for the outer rear seats are equipped with seatbelt tension- ers. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for occupants. WARNING Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

20 01 Safety

Airbag system 01

Warning symbol on the combined As well as the warning symbol, a instrument panel message may appear on the display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and the message SRS AIRBAG SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- The warning symbol in the combined instru- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec- trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately. symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.

21 01 Safety

01 Airbags

Airbag system WARNING NOTE Volvo recommends that you contact an The sensors react differently depending on authorised Volvo workshop for repair. the course of the collision and whether or Defective work in the airbag system could not the seatbelts on the driver's side and cause malfunction and result in serious per- passenger side are used. sonal injury. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags is deployed. The capacities of the airbags are also adapted to the collision force to which they are G020111 subjected. SRS system, left-hand drive The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when G020110 compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- SRS system, right-hand drive mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, takes place within tenths of a second.

22 01 Safety

Airbags 01

Airbag on the driver's side WARNING The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- Never place a child in a child seat or on a tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- is activated.1 ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS AIRBAG. Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Children under 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger WARNING seat if the airbag is activated. The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- Failure to follow the advice given above can belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this endanger life. may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. G020113

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive Passenger airbag and right-hand drive cars. The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- WARNING ger side. It is folded up into a compartment Do not put objects in front of or above the above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked instrument panel where the passenger air- SRS AIRBAG. bag is located. WARNING To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

23 01 Safety

01 Activating/deactivating the airbag*

Key switch off - PACOS* WARNING Activating/deactivating General information Never place a child in a child seat or on a The airbag for the front passenger seat can be booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, is activated and the symbol in the roof PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For console is illuminated. Failure to follow this information on how to activate/deactivate, see advice could endanger the life of the child. under the heading Activating/deactivating. WARNING Key switch off/switch The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- is located on the passenger end of the instru- senger seat if the text message in the roof ment panel and is accessible when the pas- panel indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol for the air- senger door is open, (see under the heading, bag system is also displayed on the com- Activating/deactivating). bined instrument panel. This indicates that Check that the switch is in the required posi- there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo Switch location tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible used to change position. The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, children taller than 140 cm For information on the key blade, see can sit in the front passenger seat, but page 127. never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion. WARNING The airbag is deactivated. With the switch Failure to follow the advice given above can in this position, children in a child seat or endanger life. on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller WARNING than 140 cm. If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS), then the airbag will always be activated.

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

WARNING A text message and a symbol in the roof panel NOTE indicate that the airbag for the front passenger Activated airbag (passenger seat): seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration). When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for Never place a child in a child seat or on a the airbag is displayed on the combined booster cushion on the front passenger seat instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see when the airbag is activated. This applies to page 21. everyone shorter than 140 cm. Following which, the indicator in the roof Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): console is illuminated showing the correct No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in status for the front passenger seat airbag. the front passenger seat when the airbag is For more information about the different key deactivated. positions, see page 154. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Messages G018083

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is 2 activated. A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration). G018082

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 25 01 Safety

01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)

Side airbag WARNING Location • Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. • Do not place any objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. • Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation

of the side airbags. G025315 G020118 Side airbags are a supplement the seat- • Driver's seat, left-hand drive. Side airbag locations. belts. Always use a seatbelt. In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS Child seats and side airbags (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- The protection provided by the car to children lars, the floor, the roof and other structural seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- is not diminished by the side airbag. er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and are an important part of the A child seat or booster cushion can be placed SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front on the front passenger seat provided that the seat backrests. car does not have an activated1 passenger airbag.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 24.

26 01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01 G025316

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive. The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

27 01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

Properties WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

G019985 Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the side windows. Other- The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a wise, the intended protection of the inflat- part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the able curtain, which is concealed in the head- headlining along both sides of the roof and lining, may be compromised. protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the WARNING sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the driver and passengers from striking their heads seatbelts. on the inside of the car during a collision. Always use a seatbelt.

28 01 Safety

WHIPS 01

Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS G020347

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Properties of the seat WHIPS system and child seats/booster sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front cushions cially designed head restraints for the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter The protection provided by the car to children seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end the seating position of the driver and front seat seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion collision, where the angle and speed of the col- passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash is not diminished by the WHIPS system. lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all injury. have an influence. Correct seating position WARNING For the best possible protection, the driver and WARNING front seat passenger should sit in the centre of Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS the seat with as little space as possible The WHIPS system is a supplement to the system yourself. Volvo recommends that between the head and the head restraint. seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

29 01 Safety

01 WHIPS

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop. Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision. G020126

G020125 Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre- Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the vent the WHIPS system from functioning. driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning. WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the WARNING corresponding front seat must be moved Do not squeeze rigid objects between the forward so that it does not touch the folded rear seat cushion and the front seat back- backrest. rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

30 01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

Activating the systems System Triggered Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision

Airbags In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have been deployed, the follow- NOTE WARNING ing is recommended: The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- Never drive with deployed airbags. They • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends tems are deployed only once during a colli- can make steering difficult. Other safety that you have it conveyed to an authorised sion systems may also be damaged. The smoke Volvo workshop. Do not drive with and dust created when the airbags are deployed airbags. deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ WARNING injury after intensive exposure. In case of Volvo recommends that you engage an • irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid authorised Volvo workshop to handle the The airbag system's control module is deployment sequence and airbag fabric replacement of components in the car's located in the centre console. If the centre may cause friction and skin burns. safety systems. console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not • Always contact a doctor. attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

31 01 Safety

01 Crash mode

Driving after a collision Firstly, remove the remote control key and then WARNING reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is MANUAL is still shown on the display then the displayed. Leave the car at once. car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- WARNING ing. If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- Moving the car tion. Volvo recommends that you have it If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous

G029042 position. Do not move the car further than necessary. If the car is involved in a collision, the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on WARNING the information display. This means that the car Never attempt to repair your car or reset the has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a electronics yourself if the car has been in protective state that is enforced when the col- crash mode. This could result in personal lision may have damaged any of the car's vital injury or the car not functioning as normal. functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for Volvo recommends that you always engage one of the safety systems, or the brake system. an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after Attempting to start the car CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. displayed. There must be no smell of fuel either. If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

32 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should sit comfortably and NOTE Do not attach the straps for the child seat to safely the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or In the event of questions when fitting child Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- safety products, contact the manufacturer age the straps. facing child seats until as late an age as pos- for clearer instructions. sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then Look in the installation instructions for the child front-facing booster cushions/child seats until seat for the correct fitting. up to 10 years of age. Child seats Location of child seats The position of a child in the car and the choice You may place: of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 35. • a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger NOTE airbag is not activated1. one or more child seats/booster cushions Regulations regarding the placement of • children in cars vary from country to coun- in the rear seat. try. Check what does apply. Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A Children of all ages and sizes must always sit child in the front passenger seat could suffer correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child serious injury if the airbag deploys. to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, G020128 booster cushions & attachment devices) which Child seats and airbags are not compatible. is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with NOTE optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- equipment fits and is easy to use. tions included with the product.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

33 01 Safety

01 Child safety

WARNING WARNING Label Airbag Never place a child in a child seat or on a Booster cushions/child seats with steel booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag braces or some other design that could rest is activated2. on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. in the front passenger seat if the airbag is Do not allow the upper section of the child activated. Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel seat to rest against the windscreen. Failure to follow the advice given above can on the passenger side, see the illustration on page endanger life. 24.

2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 24.

34 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Recommended child seats3 Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 0 Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the max. 10 kg ISOFIX fixture system. This fitting ISOFIX fixture system. requires an ISOFIX bracket* for correct Group 0+ L: Type approval: E1 04301146 installation. max. 13 kg L: Type approval: E1 04301146

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt car's seatbelt car's seatbelt. U: Type approval: E1 04301146 U: Type approval: E1 04301146 U: Type approval: E1 03301146

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's facing child seat, secured with the car's facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective seatbelt, straps and support legs. seatbelt, straps and support legs. cushion between the child seat and the L: Type approval: E5 03135 L: Type approval: E5 03135 dashboard. L: Type approval: E5 03135

U: Child seats which are universally U: Child seats which are universally U: Child seats which are universally approved. approved. approved.

3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 35 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 1 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- 9 – 18 kg ing child seat, secured with the car's ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. seatbelt and straps. L: Type approval: E5 04192 L: Type approval: E5 04192

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps. This fitting requires an ISOFIX and straps. bracket* for correct installation. L: Type approval: E5 03171 L: Type approval: E5 03171

U: Child seats which are universally U: Child seats which are universally U: Child seats which are universally approved. approved. approved.

36 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 2 Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- 15-25 kg ing child seat, secured with the car's ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps seatbelt and straps L: Type approval: E5 04192 L: Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's ing child seat, secured with the car's ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt. seatbelt. seatbelt. L: Type approval: E5 04191 L: Type approval: E5 04191 L: Type approval: E5 04191

37 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 2/3 Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest). Booster Seat with backrest). Booster Seat with backrest). 15 – 36 kg UF: Type approval: E1 04301169 UF: Type approval: E1 04301169 UF: Type approval: E1 04301169

Booster cushion with and without back- Booster cushion with and without back- Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion with and without rest (Booster Cushion with and without rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest). backrest). backrest). UF: Type approval: E5 03139 UF: Type approval: E5 03139 UF: Type approval: E5 03139

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option. B: Type approval: E5 03168

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class. B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

38 01 Safety

Child safety 01

WARNING vide optimum safety for children. Combined WARNING with the regular seatbelts the integrated Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion is approved for children The booster cushion must be in the locked booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag weighing between 15 and 36 kg. position before the child is placed there. is activated4. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit Raising the booster cushion Check that: in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. • the booster cushion in locked in position Failure to follow the advice given above can • the seatbelt is in contact with the child's endanger life. body and is not slack or twisted, and that the seatbelt is positioned correctly across the shoulder Integrated booster cushions* • the hip strap is low across the hips for optimum protection • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder • Carefully adjust the position of the head restraint to suit the child. G020808

Pull that handle to raise the booster cushion. Grasp the cushion with both hands and push it backwards.

G015013 Push until it locks in place.

Volvo’s integrated booster cushion for the outer rear seats is specially designed to pro-

4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 24.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 39 01 Safety

01 Child safety

WARNING Lowering the booster cushion Child safety locks, rear doors The controls for operating the rear door power Repair or replacement should only be performed by a workshop. Volvo recommends windows and the rear door opening handles that you contact an authorised Volvo work- can be blocked from opening from the inside. shop. Do not make any modifications or For more information see page 137. additions to the booster cushion yourself. If an integrated booster cushion has been ISOFIX fixture system for child seats subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn. G014507

Pull the handle.

Lower the seat and press until it locks.

NOTE G015268 Remember to stow away the booster cushion before lowering the rear seat backrest. Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see illustration above).

40 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Press the seat cushion down to access the Size Description Size Description mounting points. class class NOTE A Full size, front-facing child F Transverse infant seat, left- seat hand The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat. B Reduced size (alt. 1), front- G Transverse infant seat, right- facing child seat hand Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- WARNING the ISOFIX mounting points. facing child seat Never place a child in the passenger seat if C Full size, rear-facing child Size classes the car is equipped with an activated airbag. Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in seat different sizes. This means that not all child D Reduced size, rear-facing NOTE seats are suitable for all seats in all car models. child seat Consequently, there is a size classification for If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi- E Rear-facing infant seat cation then the car model must be included child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in on the child seat's vehicle list. order to assist users in choosing the correct child seat (see the following table). NOTE Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

41 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK (IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK (IL)

D X OK (IL)

C X OK (IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OK (IL)

C X OK (IL)

42 01 Safety

Child safety 01

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKA (IUF)

B1 X OKA (IUF)

A X OKA (IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class. IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

43 01 Safety

01 Child safety

Upper mounting points for child seats NOTE For cars with folding head restraints on the outside seats the head restraints should be folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat.

NOTE For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed before a child seat can be fitted in the mounting points.

For detailed information on how to secure the G029703 child seat in the upper mounting points, refer Location, upper attachment points. to the instructions from the child seat manufacturer. The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats. These mounting points WARNING are located on the rear side of the rear seat. The child seat's straps must always be The upper mounting points are primarily drawn through the hole in the head restraint intended for use with front-facing child seats. leg before they are tensioned at the attach- Volvo recommends that small children should ment point. sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible. The child seat's straps must be routed between the head restraint and the backrest.

44 01 Safety

45 Overview, left-hand drive cars...... 48 Overview, right-hand drive cars...... 50 Driver's door control panel...... 52 Combined instrument panel...... 53 Indicator and warning symbols...... 54 Information display...... 58 Electrical socket...... 60 Lighting panel...... 62 Left-hand stalk switch...... 65 Right-hand stalk switch ...... 68 Cruise control*...... 71 Keypad in the steering wheel* ...... 73 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers...... 74 Parking brake...... 75 Power windows...... 76 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 78 Power sunroof* ...... 82 Personal preferences...... 84 HomeLink *...... 87

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02 G019488

48 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

Steering wheel adjustment Reading lamp, right-hand side

Bonnet release Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- 02 bag indicator Control panel Interior rearview mirror Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer Display for climate control and infotainment system Lighting, fuel filler flap opener Infotainment system Door handle, lock button. Controls for climate control, infotainment Air vents in dashboard system and personal preferences Air vent for side window Climate control Cruise control Gear lever Horn, airbag Hazard warning flashers Combined instrument panel Door handle Keypad for infotainment system Glovebox Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp Parking brake washers Electrical socket/cigarette lighter Ignition switch Blind Spot Information System, BLIS Sunroof controls Switch, optional equipment No function No function Switch for interior lighting Reading lamp, left-hand side

49 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02 G028204

50 02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter Reading lamp, right-hand side

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS No function 02 Switch, optional equipment No function Parking brake Sunroof controls Control panel Ignition switch Glovebox Windscreen wipers and washers, headlamp washers Door handle Cruise control Air vent for side window Combined instrument panel Air vents in dashboard Horn, airbag Gear lever Keypad for infotainment system Climate control Hazard warning flashers Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal preferences Door handle, lock button Infotainment system Lighting, fuel filler flap opener Display for climate control and infotain- Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- ment system puter Interior rearview mirror Bonnet release Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- Steering wheel adjustment bag indicator Switch for interior lighting Reading lamp, left-hand side

51 02 Instruments and controls

Driver's door control panel

Disengaging the rear power windows. Electric child safety lock* Power windows Door mirror, left-hand side Door mirrors, setting Door mirror, right-hand side

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02 G029046

Speedometer. Tachometer – Indicates engine speed in Button for trip meter – Used to measure thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). short distances. Short presses on the but- Direction indicators, left. Indicator and warning symbols. ton switches between the two trip meters Warning symbol. T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec- Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag onds) resets an active trip meter to zero. Information display – Shows information or e 66. Temperature gauge - Used for the engine warning messages, outside temperature Main beam indicator. cooling system. A message will appear on and clock. When the outside temperature the display if the temperature becomes too is between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illu- Display – Display for automatic gear posi- high and the gauge goes into the red zone. minates on the display. This warns of icy tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front roads. The outside temperature gauge cruise control. of the air intake, for example, reduce the may show a slightly high reading after the Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and cooling capacity at high outside tempera- car has been stationary. gear positions in the 1.6D DRIVe model, tures and high engine loads. Information symbol. see page 159. Indicator and warning symbols. Direction indicator, right.

53 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Functionality check, symbols Symbols in the centre of the instrument When the symbol illuminates: All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate panel 02 1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car when the remote control key is turned to posi- further. tion II before starting. This is to check that the 2. Read the information on the information symbols are working. When the engine starts, display. Implement the action in accord- all the symbols should go out except the hand- ance with the message in the display. Clear brake symbol, which only goes out when the the message using . brake is disengaged. READ The yellow information symbol illu- If the engine does not start within minates and a text appears on the five seconds, all symbols extin- information display. The message guish except the symbols for a fault in the car's emissions system text is cleared using the READ but- and for low oil pressure. Certain ton, see page 58, or disappears symbols may have no function, automatically after a period of time (time depending on the car's specifica- depending on which function is indicated). G030755 tions. The yellow information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety NOTE and/or driveability of the car. An When a service message is shown, the sym- explanatory text is shown on the bol and message are cleared using the information display at the same time. The sym- READ button, or disappear automatically bol remains visible until the fault has been rec- after a time. tified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 58. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 58.

54 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator symbols – left-hand side Emissions system Stability system STC or DSTC* If the symbol illuminates then it For information on the system's may be due to a fault in the car's functions and symbols, see 02 emissions system. Volvo recom- page 167. mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection. Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol illuminates during ABS fault engine preheating. Preheating If this symbol illuminates then the occurs when the temperature is system is not working. The car's below -2 °C. The car can be started regular brake system continues to once the symbol goes out. work, but without the ABS function. Low level in fuel tank

G029048 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the When the symbol illuminates the engine. level in the fuel tank is low, refuel Fault in car's emissions system as soon as possible. 2. Restart the engine. ABS fault 3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys- Rear fog lamp tem checked if the symbol remains lit. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- Stability system STC or DSTC tance from an authorised Volvo workshop. No function Rear fog lamp Engine preheater (diesel) This symbol is lit when the rear fog lamp is on. Low level in fuel tank

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Indicator symbols – right-hand side Indicator symbol for trailer Low oil pressure2 This symbol flashes when the If this symbol illuminates during 02 direction indicators are used and driving then the engine's oil pres- the trailer is connected. If the sym- sure is too low. Stop the engine bol does not flash then one of the immediately and check the engine lamps on the trailer or the car is oil level, top up if necessary. If the faulty. symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal Volvo recommends that you contact an author- Parking brake applied ised Volvo workshop. The symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Always Seatbelt reminder pull the parking brake lever to the This symbol illuminates if someone end position. in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear

G029049 NOTE seat has taken off their seatbelt. Indicator symbol for trailer The symbol illuminates irrespective of how Alternator not charging hard the parking brake is applied. If this symbol illuminates while Parking brake applied driving, a fault has occurred in the Airbags – SRS Airbags – SRS electrical system. Volvo recom- If this symbol remains illuminated mends that you visit an authorised Low oil pressure or illuminates while driving, it Volvo workshop. Seatbelt reminder means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or Fault in brake system Alternator not charging IC system. Volvo recommends that If this symbol illuminates, the brake drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop fluid level may be too low. Fault in brake system for inspection.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 58.

56 02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

Stop the car in a safe place and check the have the brake system checked. Volvo rec- Low speed level in the brake fluid reservoir, see ommends that you seek assistance from If the car moves at a speed less page 223. If the reservoir level is below an authorised Volvo workshop. than 5 km/h, the information sym- 02 MIN then the car should not be driven fur- 6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN bol illuminates and DRIVER ther. Volvo recommends that the car is then the car should not be driven any fur- DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER transported to an authorised Volvo work- ther. Have the car transported to a work- DOOR OPEN,LEFT REAR shop to have the brake system checked. shop to have the brake system checked. DOOR OPEN, BONNET OPEN or RIGHT If the BRAKE and ABS symbols Volvo recommends that you seek assis- REAR DOOR OPEN is shown on the display. illuminate at the same time, there tance from an authorised Volvo workshop. Stop the car safely as soon as possible and may be a fault in the brake force close the door or bonnet. distribution system. WARNING High speed If the car is moving faster than If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end 10 km/h, the symbol illuminates will skid during heavy braking. and one of the texts indicated in the preceding paragraph appears on the display. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the Reminder – doors not closed Tailgate reminder engine. If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgate If the tailgate is open, this informa- 2. Restart the engine. is not properly closed, the driver will be tion symbol will illuminate and reminded of this. TAILGATE OPEN will appear on 3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- the display. ing. 4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 223. 5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to

3 Only cars with alarm.

57 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Messages Message Specification Message Specification

02 STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe TIME FOR REGU- Time for regular manner and turn off LAR SERVICE service. Volvo rec- the engine. Serious ommends that an risk of damage. authorised Volvo workshop carries SERVICE Volvo recommends out the service. The URGENTA that an authorised timing is determined Volvo workshop by the number of kil- checks the car ometres driven, immediately. number of months since the last serv- SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's Manual. ice, engine running

G029050 time and oil grade. SERVICE Volvo recommends SERVICE OVER- If the service inter- When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates REQUIREDA that an authorised vals are not followed the information display shows a supplemen- Volvo workshop DUE then the warranty tary message. checks the car as soon as possible. does not cover any Press the READ button (1). damaged parts. Switch between messages with the READ but- HIGH ENGINE Stop the car in a safe Volvo recommends ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory TEMP STOP manner and turn off that an authorised until the fault is rectified. ENGINE the engine. Serious Volvo workshop car- risk of damage. ries out the service.

NOTE BOOK TIME FOR Time to book regular TRANSMISSION Volvo recommends If a warning message appears while you are SERVICE service. Volvo rec- OIL CHANGE NEE- that an authorised using the trip computer, the message must ommends that an DED Volvo workshop be read (press READ) before the previous authorised Volvo checks the car as activity can be resumed. workshop carries soon as possible. out the service.

58 02 Instruments and controls

Information display

Message Specification Message Specification Message Specification REMINDER Check the oil level. TRANSMISSION The gearbox cannot TRANSMISSION Drive more smoothly 02 CHECK OIL LEVEL The message is PERFORMANCE handle full capacity. OIL TEMP HIGH or stop the car in a shown every 10 LOW Drive carefully until safe manner. Disen- 000 km (certain the message clears, gage the gear and engine variants). For see page 163. run the engine at information on idling speed until the If shown repeatedly checking the oil message clears. For then Volvo recom- level, see page 219. more information, mends that an see page 163. SOOT FILTER Diesel particle filter authorised Volvo FULL SEE OWNER requires regenera- workshop is contac- TRANSM OIL Critical fault. Stop MANUAL tion, see page 148. ted. TEMP STOP the car immediately SAFELY in a safe manner. STC SPIN CON- The function of the Volvo recommends TROL OFF/DSTC stability and traction that an authorised SPIN CONTROL control system is Volvo workshop is OFF reduced, see contacted.B page 168 for more variants. A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen. B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see page 163.

59 02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

12 V electrical socket WARNING Electrical socket in the rear seat 02 Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

NOTE Optional equipment and accessories - e.g. TV screens, music players and mobile phones - which are connected to one of the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car is locked, for example, when the parking

heater is activated at a preset time. G029082 G019621 For this reason remove the plugs from the Electrical socket and cigarette lighter. electrical sockets for optional equipment or Electrical socket in the rear seat. The electrical socket can be used for various accessories when not in use because the The electrical socket in the rear seat can be accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens, battery could be drained in the event of such used for various accessories, see "12 V elec- an occurrence! music players and mobile phones. For the trical socket" above. socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see Cigarette lighter* NOTE page 154. Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. Cigarette lighter does not work in this The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull socket. IMPORTANT out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils. Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. For used at a time. If both sockets are used the socket to supply current, the remote con- simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is trol key must be in at least position I, see applicable. page 154.

60 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when 02 the socket is not in use.

61 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

General Posi- Specification Position/parking lamps Position/parking lamps can be switched on 02 tion irrespective of remote control key position. Automatic/deactivated dipped Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre beam. Only main beam flash. position. Position/parking lamps When the remote control key is in position II the position/parking lamps and number plate light- Automatic dipped beam. Main ing are always on. beam and main beam flash work in this position. Headlamps

Headlamp levelling Automatic dipped beam* Dipped beam comes on automatically when The load in the car changes the vertical align- G020139 the remote control key is turned to position II, ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- except when the headlamp control (2) is in the zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling centre position. If necessary, the automatic the height of the beam. Light switches dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec- 1. Turn the remote control key to position II. ommends that this is performed by an author- Thumbwheel for adjusting display and 2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the ised Volvo workshop. instrument lighting end positions. Automatic dipped beam, main beam Front fog lamps* 3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively 1. Turn the remote control key to position II. Opening the fuel filler flap to raise or lower beam alignment. 2. Dipped beam is activated by means of Rear fog lamp Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no to the end position. control (1). 3. Main beam is activated by means of moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and releasing it, see page 65.

62 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

The lamps are switched off automatically when Fog lamps Fuel filler flap the remote control key is turned to position I or Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when 02 0. NOTE the car is unlocked, see page 134. Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from Instrument lighting country to country. Active Xenon headlamps* The instrument lighting is switched on when the remote control key is in position II and the Front fog lamps* headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi- The front fog lamps can be switched on along tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed with the headlamps or the position lamps/park- during the day and can be controlled manually ing lamps. at night. Press the button (4). Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter or dimmer lighting. The light in the button (4) illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on.

Enhanced display lighting Rear fog lamp To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter, The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with clock and outside temperature gauge, these the headlamps or the front fog lamps. illuminate when the car is unlocked and when Press the button (6). G026507 the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The displays extinguish when The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com- Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps the car is locked. bined instrument panel and the light in the but- If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light switched on. from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The LED illuminates when the function is activated. The LED flashes and an error message is shown on the information display in the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

event of a malfunction. The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the 02 car is moving. The function can be deactivated/activated with the headlamp control. G020789

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

Brake light The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 166.

64 02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

Stalk switch positions Direction indicators Switching, main and dipped beam The remote control key must be in position II Continuous flash sequence 02 and the headlamp control in end position, see Move the stalk switch up or down to page 62, for main beam to be switched on. end position (2). 2 Activating main beam: The stalk switch remains in its end position and 1 is moved back manually, or automatically by Move the stalk switch towards the steering steering wheel movement. wheel to the end position (4) and release. 3 4 Short flash sequence Deactivating main beam: Move the stalk switch up or down to Move the stalk switch towards the steering position (1) and release. wheel to position (3) and release. 1 The direction indicators flash three times and 2 the stalk switch returns to its home position. Home safe lighting G026380 Some of the exterior lighting can be kept Short flash sequence, direction indicators Main beam flash switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. The standard delay is Move the stalk switch gently towards the Continuous flash sequence, direction indi- 1 steering wheel to position (3). 30 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90 cators seconds, see page 85. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is Main beam flash and switching from main 1. Remove the remote control key from the to dipped beam released. Main beam flash only works when the remote control key is inserted in the ignition ignition switch. Home safe lighting and switching from switch. 2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering dipped to main beam wheel to the end position (4) and release. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

65 02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

Trip computer* NOTE car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display. During the period for regeneration4 fuel con- 02 If a warning message interrupts while you sumption may increase, see page 148. are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by AVERAGE pressing the READ button and revert to the The average fuel consumption is stored when trip computer function. the ignition is switched off and remains until the function is reset. Reset using the RESET but- Functions ton. The trip computer displays the following information: NOTE • --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used. • --.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS • --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE G029052 KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK • --- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK The range to empty is calculated based on the READ - confirms • STC ON /DSTC ON *, see page 167 average fuel consumption over the last 30 km. Thumbwheel2 - browse between menus • --- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3 No guaranteed range remains when the display and options in the trip computer list shows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK AVERAGE SPEED ". Refuel as soon as possible. RESET2 - resets When the ignition is switched off, the average speed is stored and used as the basis of the NOTE Controls new value when you continue driving. Reset To scroll through trip computer information using the RESET button. There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a turn the thumbwheel either up or down in INSTANTANEOUS steps. Continue turning to return to the starting change in driving style or if a fuel-driven Current fuel consumption is calculated every heater is used for example. point. second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the

2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Certain markets. 4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

MPH ACTUAL SPEED.3 Current speed is displayed in mph. 02 Resetting 1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE 2. Reset with one press on the RESET button. Press and hold the RESET button for at least five seconds to reset the average speed and average consumption at the same time.

3 Certain markets.

67 02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

Windscreen wipers Single sweep Windscreen/headlamp washer Raise the stalk switch to make a Move the stalk switch toward the steering 02 single sweep. wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. The wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch is released.

Intermittent wiping High-pressure headlamp washing* You can adjust and set a suitable High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a speed for intermittent wiping. Turn large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter headlamps are washed as follows: interval between sweeps. Turn it Dipped beam selected with the switch on light- down to increase the delay. ing panel: Continuous wiping The headlamps are washed the first time the The wipers sweep at normal windscreen is washed. Within the next ten speed. minutes, they are washed every fifth wash Windscreen and headlamp washers cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer The wipers sweep at high speed. interval the headlamps are washed each time. Rain sensor - On/Off Parking/position lamps selected with the Thumbwheel IMPORTANT switch on the lighting panel: Rear window wiper and washer Before activating the wipers during winter – • Active Xenon headlamps are only washed ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the Windscreen wipers off in and that any snow or ice on the wind- time that elapses. The windscreen wipers are off screen (and rear window) is scraped away. • Halogen headlamps are not washed. when the stalk switch is in position The switch on the lighting panel is in position 0. IMPORTANT 0: Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers • Active Xenon headlamps are only washed are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the screen must be wet when the windscreen time that elapses. wipers are operating. • Halogen headlamps are not washed.

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

Rear window wiper and washer wiping. If the rear window wiper is already on extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is at normal speed, no change is made. turned upwards). 02 The function for intermittent wiping for reverse On/Off can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that When activating the rain sensor, the remote you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. control key must be in position I or II and the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi- 0 Rain sensor* tion 0 (not activated). Activating the rain sensor: Press the button (B), see page 68. A display symbol shows that the rain sensor is active. To turn the rain sensor off, either: G021418 1. Press button (B) Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win- 2. Press the stalk switch downward to dow washing and wiping. The wiper blade another wiper program. If the stalk switch makes several extra sweeps once washing has is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, finished. The button at the end of the stalk the wipers make an extra sweep and then switch has three positions: return to rain sensor mode when the stalk

G029053 is released to position 0 (not activated), see Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the page 68. button. The rain sensor automatically activates the Neutral position: Function deactivated. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated windscreen wipers based on how much water when the remote control key is removed from Constant speed: Depress the bottom of it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni- the button. the rain sensor can be adjusted using the tion is switched off. thumbwheel (C), see page 68. Wiper – reversing Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen- Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69 02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

IMPORTANT 02 At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the remote control key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.

Thumbwheel Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain sensor is selected.

70 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

Activating Increasing or decreasing speed NOTE A temporary increase in speed (less than 02 one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accelerator, the car will return to the programmed speed.

Temporary disengagement Press 0 to disengage the cruise control temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the combined instrument panel. The speed set earlier is stored in the memory. G029054 G020141 The cruise control is also temporarily disengaged when: The controls for cruise control are to the left of Increase or decrease the speed by press- the steering wheel. ing and holding + or –. The speed of the car • the brake pedal or clutch pedal is when the button is released is set as the depressed Setting the desired speed: new speed. • speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav- 1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is A brief press (less than half a second) on + or elling uphill shown on the combined instrument panel. – changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1. • the gear selector is moved to position N 2. Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed. • wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs CRUISE-ON appears in the combined a temporary increase in speed lasts longer instrument panel. • than one minute. Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.

1 Depending on engine type.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71 02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

Return to the set speed – Press this button to resume the 02 previously set speed. CRUISE ON appears on the combined instrument panel.

Disengaging Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control. CRUISE ON clears on the combined instrument panel.

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Keypad in the steering wheel*

Button functions in order to enable control of the phone system with the arrow keys. 02 To return to Audio only, press EXIT. With the ENTER button you can select, activate and deactivate options in menus. The button can also be used to access the folder structure and start the playback of audio files if a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/ CD changer*. For more information, see page 255.

The keypad is available in two versions depending on the equipment in the car. The four buttons at the bottom of the steering wheel keypad control the radio and the phone. The function of a button depends on which system is active. The steering wheel keypad can be used to scroll between preset stations, change CD tracks and adjust the volume. Press and hold one of the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse or search for the next station. The phone must be active to make settings in the phone system. Activate the phone function with the PHONE button in the centre console

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers

Steering wheel adjustment WARNING NOTE 02 Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, Regulations regarding the use of hazard never while driving. Before driving, check warning flashers vary from country to coun- that the steering wheel is fixed in position. try.

Hazard warning flashers G020143

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach. 1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel. G020144 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you best. Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering indicators flash) when the car is stopped where wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press steering wheel lightly at the same time as the button to activate the function. you push the lever back. A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking activates the hazard warning flashers automatically, see page 166. The function can be deactivated with the button.

74 02 Instruments and controls

Parking brake

Parking brake (handbrake) How to apply the parking brake 1. Fully depress the foot brake pedal. 02 2. Pull the lever firmly. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position. 4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly. When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in position 1 (for manual transmission) or P (for automatic transmission) Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels away from the kerb. The lever is located between the front seats. If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the wheels towards the kerb. NOTE WARNING The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of Get into the habit of always applying the how hard the parking brake is applied. parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold WARNING the car in all situation. Make sure that children, other passengers or objects are not in danger of becoming How to release the parking brake trapped in any way when the parking brake 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. is applied or released by the driver. 2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the button, release the parking brake lever and release the button.

75 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Operation WARNING The windows can be opened and closed in two The power windows are operated using the ways: 02 Make sure that children and other passen- controls in the doors. The ignition key must be gers cannot be trapped in any way when Manual operation in position I or II for the power windows to closing the windows. Pay close attention if Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently or operate. the rear door windows are controlled from raise it gently. The power window opens or the driver's door or if the windows are The windows continue to work for a limited closed with the remote control. closes as long as the switch is actuated. amount of time when the car is stopped and after the remote control key is removed, provi- Automatic operation ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the Driver's door Fully depress one of the controls (2) or raise it, windows with caution. then release. The side window will then open or close automatically. If the window is To open a window: obstructed by an object, the movement will Depress the front of the control. stop. To close a window: WARNING Raise the front of the control. The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being NOTE blocked works with both automatic and One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise manual closing, although not with pinch when the rear windows are open is to also protection deployed. open the front windows slightly. WARNING Remote control and lock buttons If there are children in the car: To operate the power windows with lock but- Controls, power windows. tons and remote control, see pages 126 and Remember to switch off the supply to the 134. Rear window controls power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car. Front window controls Make sure that children and other passen- The driver can operate all of the power win- gers cannot be trapped in any way when dows from the driver's seat. closing the windows.

76 02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

Blocking power windows in the rear NOTE Rear power windows doors If the car has electric child safety locks on 02 the rear doors, the light indicates that these are also activated. The doors then cannot be opened from the inside. A text message is shown on the display when the electric child safety locks are activated.

Front passenger seat

The rear door windows can be operated with Blocking rear power windows and electric child safety locks*. the control on each door or with the switch on the driver's door. If the light in the switch for The light in the switch is lit blocking the rear power windows (located in The rear door windows can only be operated the control panel in the driver's door) is lit, the from the driver's door. rear door windows can only be operated from the driver's door. The windows in the rear The light in the switch is extinguished doors are operated in the same way as the The rear door windows can be operated both windows in the front doors. with the control on each rear door and with the Front passenger seat. controls on the driver's door. The control in the front passenger door operates that window only.

77 02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Interior rearview mirror Interior rearview mirror with compass* Calibrating the compass

02 G031045 G031043

Bright light from behind could be reflected in The upper right-hand corner of the rearview The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use mirror has an integrated display that shows the The compass is set for the geographical area dimming when disturbed by light from behind. compass direction in which the front of the car to which the car was delivered. The compass is pointing. Eight different directions are shown should be calibrated if the car is moved across Dipping with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north several magnetic zones. Control for dimming east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW 1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the Normal position (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). engine running at idling speed. Dimmed position. 2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 seconds. Following which, the character C is Automatic dimming* shown (the button is concealed so use a Bright light from behind is automatically paper clip for example to press it in). dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1) 3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec- is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- onds. The number for the current magnetic ming. zone is displayed.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the number for the required magnetic zone (1– 15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic 02 zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C. 6. Following which, press and hold the button in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive. 7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown on the display, which indicates G020151 G020153 that the calibration is complete. Magnetic zones, Asia. Magnetic zones, Australia. G020150 G020152 G020154 Magnetic zones, Europe. Magnetic zones, South America. Magnetic zones, Africa.

79 02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* NOTE The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving 02 in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in The door mirrors will not be extended automatically during unlocking if they were ignition position I and II. retracted using the controls in the door. Retracting the mirrors If the car is locked with the remote control 1. Press the L and R button at the same time. and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended. 2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. The function can be activated/deactivated WARNING under Car settings… Mirror fold on The door mirror on the driver's side is the locking, see page 85 for a description of the wide-angled type to provide optimal vision. menu system. Objects may appear further away than they actually are. Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors by an external force must be reset to the neutral Folding out the mirrors are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The position for electric retracting and extending to 1. Press the L and R button at the same time. rearview mirrors can be operated in ignition work. position I and II. 2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- 1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir- ically stop in the fully extended position. 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door rors. mirror or the R button for the right-hand Automatic retracting/extending 2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R door mirror. The light on the button illumi- When the car is locked/unlocked with the button. The mirrors are now reset to the nates. remote control or using the Keyless-system, neutral. see page 130, the door mirrors are automati- 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the cally retracted/extended. Home safe and approach lighting centre. The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when 3. Press the L or R button again. The light the approach lighting or home safe lighting is goes out. activated.

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS* BLIS is an information system that under certain conditions can help to draw the driver's 02 attention to vehicles moving in the same direction in the so-called "blind spot", see page 171.

Water and dirt-repellent coating* The front side windows are treated with a coating which improves the view in poor weather conditions. For information on maintenance, see page 207.

IMPORTANT Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repellent coating could be damaged.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

Open positions WARNING Ventilation position Open: 02 If there are children in the car: Press the rear edge of the control (5) Switch off the supply to the power sunroof by removing the remote control key if the upward. driver leaves the car. Close: Pull the rear edge of the control (6) downward. From ventilation position to fully open sunroof: Pull the control rearward to the end position (1) and release.

Sliding position

G007503 Automatic operation Pull the control past the point of resistance The sunroof controls are located in the roof (2) to the rear end position (1) or past the panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi- point of resistance (3) to the forward end tions: position (4) and release. The sunroof Ventilation position, up at the rear edge opens/closes completely. G029222 Manual operation Sliding position, backwards/forwards Opening, automatic Open: The remote control key must be in position I or Opening, manual Pull the control rearward to the point of II. resistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi- Closing, manual mum open position as long as the button is kept depressed. Closing, automatic Close: Opening, ventilation position Press the control forward to the point of Closing, ventilation position resistance (3). The sunroof moves to

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

closed position as long as the button is If you need to interrupt closing: Wind deflector kept depressed. Press the lock button again. 02

WARNING WARNING The sunroof's pinch-protection function Make sure that children or other passengers only operates during automatic closing, not are not in danger of becoming trapped in manual closing. any way when closing the sunroof with the remote control. Always operate the sunroof with caution. Closing with remote control or lock button Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it. The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position. Pinch protection The sunroof's pinch protection function is activated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position.

G020157 WARNING The sunroof's pinch protection function only One long press on the lock button closes operates during automatic closing, not dur- the sunroof and all the windows. The doors ing manual closing. and the tailgate are locked. Make sure that nobody is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the sunroof.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

Possible settings Display Clock, adjustment Personal preferences can be set for some of The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa- 02 MENU the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli- rately. mate control and audio functions. For audio EXIT 1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow functions, see page 246. ENTER up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but- Control panel ton (E). Navigation 2. Select the number for adjustment using Use "arrow right" or "arrow left" on the navigation button. The settings are shown on the display (A). 3. Press to start the clock. Open the menu to enter settings: ENTER A 1. Press MENU (B). NOTE 2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings… with If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM the navigation button (E). is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has 3. Press ENTER (D). been adjusted. 4. Select an alternative with the navigation E B button (E). Climate settings D C 5. Press ENTER to activate the selection. Activated function is shown in the display Automatic blower adjust with . Deactivated function is shown in The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in cars equipped with ECC: the display with . Select from Low, Normal and High. Close the menu: G026307 Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec- Recirculation timer Control panel. ond. When the timer is active, the air recirculates for 3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air temperature.

84 02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

Select On/Off depending on whether or not Doors – auto lock central locking button, as well as the outside you wish the recirculation timer to be When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the door handle button on cars with the keyless active. doors and tailgate can be locked automatically. system: 02 The On/Off option is available. Pulling the door Reset all • Auto. close all windows - all windows handle twice unlocks and opens the doors and the sunroof are closed simultaneously Resets the climate function options to the fac- from the inside. tory settings. with one long press on the lock button. Doors unlock This function can be selected for the unlock button on the remote control and the front Car settings There are two alternatives for unlocking: doors' central locking button: • All doors – one press of the remote control Retract mirrors when locking* unlocks all doors and the tailgate. • Auto. open all windows – all windows are When the car is locked/unlocked with the opened simultaneously with one long Driver door, then all – one press of the remote control the door mirrors can be retrac- • press on the unlock button. remote control unlocks the driver's door. A ted/extended automatically. The On/Off option second press then unlocks all doors and is available. Approach lighting the tailgate. Select the time the car's lights should remain Reduced guard* Keyless entry* on when the approach lighting button is The deadlocks function can be temporarily pressed. The following alternatives are availa- • All doors - all doors are unlocked simul- deactivated and the alarm level reduced if taneously. ble: someone wishes to remain in the car and the 30 seconds doors have to be locked from the outside. The • Doors on same side – front and rear • Activate once and Ask on exit options are doors on the same side are unlocked • 60 seconds simultaneously. available, see pages 135 and 139. • 90 seconds • Both front doors – both front doors are Unlock confirm. light unlocked simultaneously. Home safe lighting The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- • Either front door – any door or the tailgate Select the time the car's lights should remain back when the car is unlocked with the remote can be unlocked separately. on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled control. The On/Off option is available. back after the remote control key has been Simultaneous closing/opening of all removed. The following alternatives are avail- Lock confirm. light windows able: The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- This function can be selected for the lock but- back when the car is locked with the remote ton on the remote control and the front doors' control. The On/Off option is available.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 85 02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

• 30 seconds 60 seconds 02 • • 90 seconds Information • VIN number… - (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity number. • Number of keys… - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.

86 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

General NOTE WARNING HomeLink is designed not to work if the car If HomeLink is used to operate a garage 02 is locked from the outside. door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in Save the original remote controls for future motion. programming (e.g. when switching to another car). Do not use the HomeLink remote control Delete the button programming when the for any garage door that does not have car is to be sold. safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it Metallic sun visors should not be used in detects that something is preventing its cars fitted with HomeLink. This may have movement, and stop directly and reverse. A an adverse effect on its function. garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Operation Internet: www.homelink.com. G030070 When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote Programming for the first time HomeLink is a programmable remote control controls. which can control up to three different devices The first step erases the memory in (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- Depress the programmed button to activate HomeLink and must not be carried out when ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- only one individual button is being reprogram- replace their remote controls. HomeLink is cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- med. ton is kept depressed. supplied built into the left-hand sun visor. 1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- NOTE release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- grammable buttons and one indicator lamp. If the ignition is not activated, HomeLink will work for 30 minutes after the driver's ing indicates that HomeLink is set in door has been opened. "learn mode" and is ready to be programmed. The original remote controls can of course be 2. Position the original remote control used in parallel with HomeLink. 5-30 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator lamp.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

The particular distance that is required ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds Programming individual buttons between the original remote control and and indicates that the device has a "roll- To reprogram an individual button, proceed in 02 HomeLink depends on the programming ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- accordance with the following: of the device in question. Perhaps several ilar is not activated when the pro- 1. Depress the required button on attempts will be required at different dis- grammed HomeLink button is HomeLink and do not release until step 3 tances. Maintain each position for approx. depressed. Continue the programming has been completed. 15 seconds before trying a new one. in accordance with the following. 1 2. 3. Depress the button for the original remote 5. Locate the "programming button " on the When the indicator lamp on HomeLink control and the button to be programmed receiver for the garage door for example, starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not normally located close to the antenna's release the buttons until the indicator lamp bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- has changed over from slow to rapid flash- culty in finding the button - consult the cator lamp. ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful supplier's manual, or contact the supplier The particular distance that is required programming. via the Internet: www.homelink.com. between the original remote control and 4. Test the programming by depressing the 6. Depress and release the "programming HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several programmed button on HomeLink and button". The button flashes for attempts will be required at different dis- watching the indicator lamp: approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period. tances. Maintain each position for approx. • Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 15 seconds before trying a new one. minates with a constant glow when the 7. Depress the programmed button on button is kept depressed, this indicates HomeLink, while the "programming but- 3. Depress the button on the original remote that the programming is complete. The ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for control. The indicator lamp will start to garage door, gate or similar should now approx. 3 seconds and then release. flash. When the flashing has changed over be activated when the programmed Repeat the press/hold/release sequence from a slow to a rapid flashing - release HomeLink button is depressed. up to 3 times to conclude the program- both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp ming. flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds 4. Test the programming by depressing the and then changes over to a constant programmed button on HomeLink and glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- 7. Depress the programmed button on minates with a constant glow when the HomeLink, while the "programming but- button is kept depressed, this indicates ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for 02 that the programming is complete. The approx. 3 seconds and then release. garage door, gate or similar should now Repeat the press/hold/release sequence be activated when the programmed up to 3 times to conclude the program- HomeLink button is depressed. ming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds Erasing programming and then changes over to a constant It is only possible to erase the programming for glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds buttons. and indicates that the device has a "roll- Depress the two outer buttons and do not ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- release until the indicator lamp starts to ilar is not activated when the pro- flash after approx. 20 seconds. grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming > HomeLink is now set in so-called in accordance with the following. "learn mode" and is ready to be programmed once more, see page 87. 5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have difficulty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com. 6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89 General information on climate control...... 92 Manual climate control, AC...... 94 Electronic climate control, ECC*...... 97 Air distribution...... 100 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*...... 101 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)...... 104

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE CONTROL 03 Climate control

General information on climate control

Air conditioning Fault tracing and repair Display The climate control system cools or heats as Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault There is a display above the climate control well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger tracing and repair of the climate control system panel. This displays climate control settings. compartment. The car is equipped with either to an authorised Volvo workshop. manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC, Personal preferences Electronic Climate Control). Refrigerant 03 You can set preferences for two climate control The air conditioning system contains R134a functions: NOTE refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- • Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to The air conditioning system can be rine, which means that it is harmless to the cars with ECC). switched off, but to ensure the best possible ozone layer. The system must only be charged air in the passenger compartment and pre- with R134a refrigerant, see also page 286. • Recirculation timer for passenger com- vent the windows from misting, it should Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo partment air. always be on. workshop carries out this work. For information about these settings, see page 84. Misting windows Passenger compartment filter Remove misting on the insides of the windows All air entering the car's passenger compart- by first using the defroster function. ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win- be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the dows with a normal window cleaning agent. Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, Ice and snow it may be necessary to replace the filter more Remove ice and snow from the climate control often. air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen). NOTE There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

92 03 Climate control

General information on climate control

Air vents in the dashboard ECC* Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat- Actual temperature isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun- The temperature you select corresponds to the roof (if fitted). physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation Acceleration in and around the car. The air conditioning system switches off tem- 03 The system includes a sun sensor which porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a detects the side from which the sun is shining temporary rise in temperature. into the passenger compartment. This means Condensation that the temperature can differ between the In warm weather, condensation from the air right and left-hand air vents despite the con- conditioning may drip under the car. This is trols being set for the same temperature on normal. both sides. G019942 Sensor location Open • The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard. Closed • The temperature sensor for the passenger Lateral airflow compartment is behind the climate control panel. Vertical airflow • The outside temperature sensor is located Aim the outer vents towards the side windows on the door mirror. to remove misting from the front side windows. • The humidity sensor is located in the inte- During cold weather - Close the centre vents rior rearview mirror. for optimum comfort and best demisting. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

Control panel

2 8

3 4 1 9 03

6 7 G026308

Fan Functions 2. Recirculation Recirculation can be used to Recirculation 1. Fan Increase or decrease the fan shut out bad air, exhaust Defroster speed by turning the knob. fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in Air distribution If the knob is turned anticlock- the passenger compartment wise and the fan indicator in AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off is recirculated. No outside air the display goes out, the fan is taken into the car. Recircu- Heated front left seat and the air conditioning are lation (together with the air conditioning sys- switched off. The display shows the fan symbol tem) cools the passenger compartment more Heated front right seat and OFF. quickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir- Rear window and door mirror defrosters culates for too long then there is a risk of the windows misting. Temperature

94 03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

Timer 4. Air distribution 6. and 7. Heated front seats* The timer function reduces the risk of icing, The airflow can be distributed misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). to the windows, dashboard See page 84, for activating/deactivating the vents or floor by pressing the function. When the Defroster (3) program is air distribution buttons. selected, recirculation is deactivated. A symbol on the display 3. Defroster above the climate control 03 Used to quickly remove mist- panel and an illuminated light in the relevant Higher heat: ing and ice from the wind- button indicate which function has been Press the button once – both lights illumi- screen and side windows. Air selected. flows to the windows at high nate. Refer to the table on page 100. fan speed. The light in the Lower heat: defroster button illuminates 5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF) Press the button once – one light illumi- when the function is active. ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's nates. The following also takes place when the AUTO function. This way, Heat off: defroster function is activated in order to pro- incoming air is cooled and vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- Press the button three times – light not illu- dehumidified. ger compartment: minated. OFF: The air conditioning is the air conditioning (AC) is automatically 8. Rear window and door mirror • off. switched on (can be switched off with the defrosters AC button (5) When the defroster function is activated the air Heating is used to quickly • recirculation is automatically disengaged. conditioning is automatically switched on (can remove misting and ice from be switched off with the AC button). An illumi- the rear window and door mir- When the defroster is switched off the climate nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in rors. Press the button once to control returns to the previous settings. the button shows the function selected. start simultaneous rear window and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is active if one lamp is illuminated in the button. The function is switched off manually or automatically. Switch off manually with one press

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95 03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

on the button. Automatic switching off disconnects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 – 20 minutes depending on outside temperature. During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear 03 window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually. 9. Temperature Select cooling or heating for both driver and passenger side.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

Control panel

AUTO Functions 2. Fan Turn the knob to increase or Fan 1. AUTO The AUTO function automat- decrease fan speed. If AUTO Recirculation/Air quality system ically regulates climate con- is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The Defroster trol and maintains the selected temperature. The previously set fan speed is Air distribution AUTO function controls heat- disengaged. ing, air conditioning, fan AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off speed, recirculation, and air NOTE Heated front left seat distribution. If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan Heated front right seat If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and Rear window and door mirror defrosters matically. All manual settings are switched off OFF. when AUTO is switched on. The display shows Temperature selector AUTO CLIMATE.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

3. Recirculation The air quality system consists of a multi-filter • The defroster functions for the front, side The function is selected to and a sensor. The filter separates gases and and rear windows can be used to demist shut out bad air, exhaust particles to reduce the levels of odours and the windows. gases etc. from the passen- pollution in the passenger compartment. When 4. Defroster ger compartment. The air in the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air Used to quickly remove mist- the passenger compartment intakes are closed and the air in the passenger ing and ice from the wind- 03 is recirculated, i.e. no outside compartment is recirculated. A green light (A) screen and side windows. Air air is taken into the car when illuminates in the button when the air quality flows to the windows at high this function is activated. If the air in the car sensor is active. fan speed. The light in the recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist- Activating the air quality sensor: defroster button illuminates ing on the insides of the windows. when the function is active. Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality Timer sensor (normal setting). The following also takes place when the The timer function reduces the risk of icing, defroster function is activated in order to pro- misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). Or: vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- To activate/deactivate the function see Switch between three functions by press- ger compartment: page 84. ing repeatedly the recirculation button. • the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the NOTE • Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A) illuminates. AC button (6) When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation No recirculation engaged, provided it is not • recirculation is automatically disengaged. is always deactivated. • required for cooling in hot weather – light When the defroster is switched off the climate not illuminated. control returns to the previous settings. 3. Air quality system* • Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illu- Same button as recirculation. 5. Air distribution minates. The airflow can be distributed Keep the following in mind: to the windows, dashboard • As a rule, the air quality sensor should vents or floor by pressing the always be engaged. air distribution buttons. • Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

A symbol on the display above the climate con- 7 and 8. Heated front seats* on the button. Automatic switching off discon- trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevant To activate front seat heating: nects the rear window and door mirrors after button indicate which function has been 12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem- selected. perature. Refer to the table on page 100. During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear 6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF) 03 ON: The air conditioning is on. window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. It is controlled by the system's Higher heat: The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must AUTO function. This way, Press the button once – both lights illumi- be switched off manually. incoming air is cooled and nate. dehumidified. 10. Temperature selector Lower heat: The temperatures on the OFF: Off Press the button once – one light illumi- driver and passenger sides When the defroster function is activated the air nates. can be set independently. conditioning is automatically switched on (can Press the button once to acti- be switched off with the AC button). Heat off: vate one side only. Press Press the button three times – light not illu- again to activate the other NOTE minated. side. Press the button a third time to activate The climate control system's demisting 9. Rear window and door mirror both sides. function with humidity sensor is significantly defrosters reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- The active side is indicated by the button's light Heating is used to quickly and in the display above the climate control vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually remove misting and ice from selected air distribution and fan speed. panel. the rear window and door mirrors. Press the button once to When the car is started, the most recent setting start simultaneous rear win- is resumed. dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is NOTE active if one lamp is illuminated in the button. Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by The function is switched off manually or auto- selecting a higher or lower temperature than matically. Switch off manually with one press the actual desired temperature.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Climate control

Air distribution

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use: Air to windows. Some air to remove ice and Air to the floor and windows. to ensure comfortable flows from the air vents. The misting quickly. Some air flows from the dash- conditions and good air is not recirculated. Air board air vents. demisting in cold or conditioning is always humid weather. 03 engaged.

Air to windscreen and side to prevent misting Air to floor and from dash- in sunny weather with windows. Some air flows and icing in a cold and board air vents. cool outside tempera- from the air vents. humid climate. (Not tures. for low fan speed.)

Airflow to windows and from to ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air flows to to warm the feet. dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry the dashboard air vents and weather. windows.

Airflow to the head and to ensure efficient Airflow to windows, from to provide cooler air for chest from the dashboard cooling in warm dashboard air vents and to the feet or warmer air air vents. weather. the floor. to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

100 03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

General information about heaters Refuelling Battery and fuel The parking heater heats the engine and pas- If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel senger compartment and can be started level is too low, the parking heater is switched directly or with the timer. off automatically and a message appears on the information display. Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car Acknowledge the message by pressing the 03 is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- indicator stalk READ button once. tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature. IMPORTANT At -10 °C or lower the maximum running time Repeated use of the parking heater com- of the parking heater is 50 minutes. bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting. WARNING The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's The car must be outdoors when the petrol battery is recharged adequately to replace or diesel heater is used. Warning decal on fuel filler flap. the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis. WARNING NOTE Fuel which spills out could be ignited. When the parking heater is active there may Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- be smoke from underneath the car, which is ting to refuel. perfectly normal. Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.

Parking on a hill If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Activating the heater Symbols and display messages Display Specification When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor- HEATER STOP- The heater has been mation symbol in the combined PED LOW BAT- stopped by the car's instrument panel illuminates and TERY electronics in order the information display shows an to facilitate starting 03 explanatory text. the engine. HEATER STOP- The heater has been Display Specification PED LOW FUEL stopped by the car's electronics in order FUEL HEATER ON The heater is LEVEL to facilitate starting switched on and the engine and driv- running. ing 50 km.

G029052 TIMER IS SET FOR Reminder that the FUEL HEATER heater will start at Direct start and immediate stop READ button the set time after the car has been left, 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT 1 Thumbwheel when the remote START. RESETbutton 1 control key is 2. Press the RESET button to select between removed from the ON and OFF. ignition switch. ON: Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer. OFF: Parking heater switched off. With the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

Heating of the passenger compartment will After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can NOTE begin as soon as the engine coolant has be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with reached the correct temperature. the thumbwheel. All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset. Set the alternative time in the same way as NOTE TIMER 1. The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running. Deactivating a timer-started heater 03 A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- Setting the timer ceed as follows: The time when the car shall be used and heated 1. Press the READ button. is specified with the timer. 2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2. PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK TIMER 2. HEAT TIMER 1. The text ON flashes on the display. 2. Briefly press the RESET button so that the 3. Press RESET. hours setting starts to flash. The text OFF is shown with a constant 3. Select the required hour using the thumb- glow and the heater is switched OFF. wheel. A timer-started heater can be switched off in 4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- accordance with the instructions in the section ing minutes setting. "Direct start and immediate stop". 5. Select the required minute using the Clock/timer thumbwheel. The heater's time is connected to the car's 6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting. clock. 7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 03 Climate control

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)

Auxiliary heater (diesel) In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may be required for achieving the correct temperature in the engine and passenger compartment during cold weather. The heater starts automatically when extra 03 heat is required when the engine is running. The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics. When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Climate control

105 Front seats...... 108 Interior lighting...... 111 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment ...... 114 Rear seat...... 118 Cargo area...... 120

106 INTERIOR 04 Interior

Front seats

Seating position, manual seat Lumbar support1 (driver's and passenger The seats can be adjusted for a certain time seat*), turn the wheel. after unlocking the door with the remote con- Backrest rake: turn the wheel. trol key without the key being inserted into the ignition switch. The seat can always be Control panel for power seat*. adjusted in ignition position I or II. Front edge of seat cushion up/down WARNING Seat, forwards/backwards Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 18, before set- Seat, up/down ting off, never while driving. Backrest rake 04 Check that the seat is locked in position. An overload protection is deployed if one of the seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the Seating position, power seat* ignition and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings The driver's and passenger seats can be can be adjusted at a time. adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving positions. Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after changing the position setting. Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion (driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/ down. Raise/lower the seat (driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/down. G020199

1 Also applies to power seat.

108 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Front seats

Memory function WARNING Tipping the front seat backrest* Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Memory in remote control key The settings for the driver's seat are stored in 04 the memory for the remote control key with which the car is locked. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the G020200 driver's seat adopts the stored settings when Buttons for memory function. the driver's door is opened. The passenger seat backrest can be folded Store setting NOTE forward to make room for long loads. 1. Adjust seat. The remote control key memory is inde- 1. Move the seat as far back as possible. 2. Press and hold button while pressing M pendent of seat memory. 2. Adjust the backrest to an upright position button , or simultaneously. 1 2 3 90 degrees. Using a stored setting 3. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest Press one of the memory buttons 1–3 until the while folding it forwards. seat stops. If you release the button then the 4. Push the seat forward so that the head movement of the seat will stop. restraint "locks" in under the glovebox. Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press any of the buttons to stop the function.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 04 Interior

Front seats

Inlaid mats* Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially produced for your car.

WARNING Before setting off check that the inlaid mat in the driver area is firmly affixed and secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Interior lighting

Reading lamps and interior lighting Front roof lighting Vanity mirror* The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof console.

Rear roof lighting

04 G020201 G020210

Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. The lamp is automatically switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off closed. G030855 Interior lighting Reading lamps, rear. Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off Glovebox lighting Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off Glovebox lighting is switched on and off All lighting in the passenger compartment can respectively when the lid is opened or closed. be switched on in ignition position I and II as Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off well as when the engine is running. The lighting The lamps are switched on or off by pressing can also be activated within 30 minutes after: the relevant button. • the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0 Courtesy lighting Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- the car has been unlocked but the engine • ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- has not been started. tively when a side door is opened or closed.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 111 04 Interior

Interior lighting

Cargo area lighting Passenger compartment lighting is switched The lighting in the cargo area is switched on off when: and off respectively when the tailgate is • the engine is started opened or closed. • the car is locked with the key or remote control key. Automatic lighting Passenger compartment lighting comes on Using the switch (2), see page 111, three posi- and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors tions can be selected for the lighting the pas- is open. senger compartment: If any lighting is switched on manually and the 04 • Off – right-hand side (marked with 0) car is locked then it will be switched off auto- depressed, automatic lighting switched matically after 5 minutes. off. • Neutral position – automatic lighting activated. The dimmer function is active. • On – left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on. Neutral position When the switch (2) is in neutral position passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the below. The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if: • the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade. • the engine is stopped and the remote control key is turned to position 0.

112 04 Interior

Interior lighting

113 04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

Storage spaces

114 04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

Storage pocket on rear of front seats. Glovebox Coat hanger Storage compartment in door panel with cup holder. Ticket clip Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions. Glovebox Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs and cup holder, *) and storage compart- 04 ment behind the centre console. Bottle holder*

Coat hanger, only for light garments. G024208

Storage compartment and cup holder. The owner's manual and maps can be kept The coat hanger is located on the passenger Storage pocket* on front edge of centre here for example. There are also holders for seat head restraint. Only hang light garments rear seat cushion. coins, pens and fuel cards. on the hanger. The glovebox can be locked with the remote WARNING control key's detachable key blade. Further information is available on page 127. Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 115 04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

Storage under the front armrest Cup holder in centre console

04 G026704 G018371 G018372 In the deeper compartment there is space for There is a storage space under the armrest. 10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored There is space for a double cup holder under There is also a smaller storage space in the vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have the roller cover. The space can be used for detachable armrest. Press the small button space. storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the and lift the armrest to open the shallow com- rear edge of the cup holder where there is a partment. Press the large button and lift the recess. armrest to open the deeper compartment. If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front edge of the space and then press down the rear edge of the cup holder. Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge from below and pulling forward.

116 04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

Storage compartment behind the gear Bottle holder* Ashtray* lever

04 G017441 G019622

A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on An ashtray is located towards the rear of the When there are no buttons for parking assis- the rear of the tunnel console. tunnel console. tance and BLIS, see page 169 and page Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the 171, the space can be used as a storage com- cover. partment. Emptying the ashtray: WARNING 1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra- Objects placed in the storage compart- tion, and tilt the cover up. ments must not obstruct the parking brake 2. Then lift the ashtray out. lever when it is applied.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 04 Interior

Rear seat

Head restraint, rear Tipping the rear seat backrest IMPORTANT The head restraints could be damaged if IMPORTANT they are not removed for loading. The head There must be no objects on the rear seat restraint in the centre must also be removed when the backrest is to be folded down. The for heavy loads. seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be aligned with middle of the back of the head. Raise the G020790 head restraint as necessary. To lower the head restraint, press the button by The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards the right-hand pillar at the same time as push- together, or individually, to make it easier to ing down the head restraint. To remove the Lowering the backrest. transport long objects. To avoid damaging the head restraint, the button by the right-hand pil- seatbelts when folding the backrests up or Rear edge of seat cushion lar must be pressed while lifting out the head down, these should be hooked onto the grab restraint. Lock catch handles. Lowering the backrest 1. Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before lowering or raising the backrests. Location of head restraint under seat cushion

118 04 Interior

Rear seat

2. Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to fold the seat cushions forward. 3. Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to release the backrest. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place. 4. Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and remove the head restraints on the outside seats. The centre seat's head restraint must be removed for a fully level floor. 04 5. Place the head restraints in the plastic sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised seat cushions.

NOTE When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING Remember to take down the seatbelts once you have raised the backrest.

119 04 Interior

Cargo area

Safety net* 2. Do the same on the other side. The attach- Safety grille* ments on the net spring shut. Pull the net over towards the left bracket to fit it in place. 3. Check that the attachments on the safety net are securely fastened in the keyed recesses in the roof panel.

Using the safety net with lowered backrests 04 The safety net can also be used when the backrests are lowered. In this case, use the front attachment points in the roof panel.

G020768 Removing the safety net G014730 1. Pull one of the net's attachments rearward The retractable safety net storage cassette is to the large notch and pull it out. The safety grille is designed to help prevent mounted on the rear of the backrest. 2. Detach the other attachment in the same loads or pets from being thrown forward in the way. passenger compartment in the event of sud- Using the safety net with raised den braking. For safety reasons, the grille must backrests. Removing the safety net storage always be correctly fastened and secured. 1. Pull out the safety net horizontally back- cassette. ward. Extend the right hand attachment 1. Lower the entire backrest. Folding up and hold it extended. Insert the attachment If the safety grille is in the way it can be folded into the rear keyed notch in the roof panel. 2. Press the cassette outward to release it up to the roof: from the mounting brackets. Then press the attachment forward to the 1. Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille. front notch. The attachment must be pressed so far that the flange rides over the WARNING 2. Pull straight backward and upward. Then release. The gas struts prevent the grille restriction between the front and rear Loads in the cargo area must be firmly from dropping down. notches. secured even if the safety net is correctly fitted. To fold down the grille, do the reverse.

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Cargo area

Removing Cargo cover* 4. The button springs back when the cargo Remove the safety grille as follows: cover is correctly located. 1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward slightly 5. Repeat the procedure on the opposite (to relieve the load from the gas struts). side. 2. Remove the caps from the nuts on either side that secure the safety grille. 3. Unscrew the nuts until the threads are flush with the edge of the nuts. 4. Turn the grille backward in the car slightly to release it from the trim. Do not angle the 04 grille too much as it can become wedged, making it difficult to pull out.

5. Repeat for the other mounting and then G020766 carefully lift the grille out of the car. Cargo cover. Attaching Fitting the cargo cover. G020767 To fit the safety grille: Fit the cargo cover as follows: 1. Follow the instructions in the reverse order. 1. Move the front section of the cargo cover 6. Check that the cargo cover is fitted firmly 2. Tighten the two nuts to 24 Nm. backwards/over the cassette. in the cargo area. In the event of uncertainty about attaching or 2. Following which, fit the cargo cover in its 7. Fit the front section of the cargo cover in removing the safety grille, consult a workshop tracks along the side panels, furthest into the wedge shaped tracks on the side pan- - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- the cargo area. els, against the rear seat. mended. 3. Push the button forward so that the 8. The cargo cover is now ready for use. catches are retracted. Following which, press the cargo cover down in the track. WARNING Do not place objects on the cargo cover or on its front section.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121 04 Interior

Cargo area

Use Using the safety net together with the NOTE Pull the cargo cover over the cargo area and cargo cover hook it into the tracks in the rear pillars in the When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it cargo area. is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place. Removing the cargo cover. 1. Lift up the front section of the cargo cover, move it backwards and then allow it to Load retaining eyelets* hang free. 2. Move the button forwards, lift up one end 04 of the cargo cover. Repeat on the opposite side. Following which, pull out the cargo cover. G020769

1. Tip the backrests slightly forward to access the safety net cassette. Start with the 40% section. 2. Extend the safety net rearward. G014757 3. Fold the backrests back up. 4. Hook the net into the attachment points in The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten the roof panel as described for raised straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo backrests. area.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Interior

Cargo area

Electrical socket in cargo area* Bag holder*

04 G014731 G014756

Fold down the cover to access the electrical The bag holder holds shopping bags in place socket. This socket works regardless of and prevents them from tipping over and spill- whether or not the ignition is on. ing their contents in the cargo area. 1. Open the hatch in the cargo area. NOTE 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. Remember that using the electrical socket with the engine switched off involves the risk of discharging the car's battery.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 Remote control key with key blade...... 126 Active locks...... 129 Keyless drive*...... 130 Battery in remote control key...... 133 Locking and unlocking ...... 134 Child safety locks...... 137 Alarm* ...... 138

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

Remote control key Loss of a remote control key Remote control key functions The car is supplied with two remote control If you lose a remote control key, take the car keys. and the other remote control keys to a Volvo workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is The remote control keys contain detachable recommended. The code of the missing metal key blades for mechanical locking/ remote control key must be erased from the unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox. system as a theft prevention measure. The key blades' unique code is available at authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- Immobiliser ommended for ordering new key blades. The remote control keys are fitted with coded A maximum of six remote control keys/key chips. The code must be accepted by the blades can be programmed and used for one reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The car single car. can only be started if the correct remote control key with the correct code is used. G019402 05 Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate. When the car is unlocked using the remote Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also control key or Keyless drive system, two short close the side windows and the sunroof. flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi- Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and the cate that unlocking was correctly performed. tailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) For locking, the indication takes place with one to also open the side windows. long flash and only if all locks are locked, after Approach lighting – Switches on the light- the doors and the tailgate have been closed. ing at a distance – lights up the area around a car parked in a dark location. Press the Personal preferences in the menu system can button once to switch on the interior light- be used to the deactivate indication via the ing, position/parking lamps, number plate direction indicators. There will then be no visual lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The indication as to whether the lock status is cor- lighting is switched off automatically after rect, see page 85.

126 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on Detachable key blade Removing the key blade setting the delay time, see page 85. To remove the key blade from the remote con- Tailgate – Press the button once to unlock trol key: the tailgate only.1 Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the red Pull out the key blade at the same time. button for at least three seconds or press it twice within three seconds to activate the Attaching the key blade direction indicators and the horn. The func- Be careful when inserting the key blade into the tion can be turned off with the same button remote control key. once it has been active for at least 5 sec- 1. Hold the remote control key with the nar- onds. Otherwise the function switches off row end pointing down and lower the key automatically after 30 seconds. blade into its slot.

G019403 2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in WARNING position. You should hear a "click". 05 If the sunroof and windows are closed using Using the remote control key's detachable key the remote control key, check that no one is blade: Unlocking doors with the key blade in danger of getting hands caught. If central locking cannot be activated with the • the driver's door can be opened manually remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- if central locking cannot be activated with charged, then the driver's door can be the remote control key, see page 131. IMPORTANT unlocked and opened as follows: • access to the glovebox can be blocked, The narrow section of the remote control 1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door key is particularly sensitive - this contains see page 128. keyhole. the chip. The car cannot be started if the • the rear doors' mechanical child safety chip is damaged. locks can be activated/deactivated, see 2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and page 137. open the door. • PACOS* activated/deactivated, see page 24.

1 The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

NOTE Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked When the driver's door is unlocked using the position. key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the Pull out the key blade. remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 139. Unlocking takes place in reverse order.

Locking the glovebox NOTE The remote control key cannot unlock the glovebox without the key blade. This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.

05 G020034

The glovebox is locked. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. (For information on the key blade, see page 127.) Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

128 05 Locks and alarm

Active locks G019450

Active locks for remote control key with 05 key blade. Active locks for remote control key without key blade.

129 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Keyless lock and ignition system Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the • the READ button has been pressed. car Never leave any remote control key in the In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remote control key must be no more than approx. car 1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate. If a remote control key with keyless drive function is left in the car, it is made passive when This means that the person who wishes to the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised open a door must have the remote control key entry. with him or her. It is not possible to open a door if the remote control key is on the other side of If someone breaks into the car and finds the the car. remote control key, it can be activated and used again. It is therefore important to handle The grey area in the illustration indicates the all remote control keys with equal care. range covered by the system's antennas. Interference to remote control key If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless G019451 drive remote control key with them, a warning function 05 Electromagnetic screening and fields can inter- Keyless function range message appears on the information display and a reminder signal sounds. The warning fere with the keyless drive system. To avoid The keyless drive system allows the car to be message disappears when the remote control this: do not place the remote control key near unlocked, driven and locked without the need key is brought back to the car or when the igni- mobile phones, metallic objects or, for exam- for a key. You simply need to have the remote tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is ple, in a metal briefcase. control key with you in a pocket or a bag. only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or If interference is experienced nonetheless, use The system makes it easier and more conven- II after someone has opened and closed a the remote control key and key blade in the ient to open the car, for example with shopping door. normal way, see page 126. bags in one hand and a child in the other. It The warning message and reminder signal dis- saves you having to take out or look for the appear when the remote control key is brought remote control key. back to the car after one of the following The two remote control keys incorporate the actions: keyless drive function. You can order addi- • a door has been opened and closed tional remote controls. The keyless drive system can handle up to six remote controls. • the ignition dial has been turned to position 0

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

Locking NOTE Unlocking doors with the key blade On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.

Unlocking When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas: 1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant handle.

G020033 2. Open the tailgate by pressing under the G020225 tailgate opening button and lift the tailgate. 05 Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles. If for some reason the keyless drive function in If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- When the remote control key is within the range the remote control key is not operating, the car can be unlocked using the remote control key charged, then the driver's door can be opened covered by the system's antennas, the doors as follows: and the tailgate are locked as follows: functions, see page 126. 1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out Push in the lock button on one of the door Power seat – remote control key with the plastic cover in the handle by inserting handles. memory function the key blade in the hole on the bottom of All doors must be closed before the lock button If several people with keyless drive remote the cover. is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock. control keys get into the car, then the driver's seat will be adjusted for the person who opens 2. Unlock the door using the key blade. When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the the door first. inside of the doors retract.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

NOTE Door handle, right-hand rear When the driver's door is unlocked using the Centre console, under the rear section key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the Centre console, under the front section remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 139. WARNING People with pacemaker operations should Antenna location not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

Personal preferences 05 The Keyless Drive system can have personal preferences applied, see page 85. G020074

The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car: Rear bumper, inside centre Door handle, left-hand rear Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Battery in remote control key

Low battery in remote control key 1. Place the remote control key with the key- When the battery runs down and full function- pad downward and prize up the cover ality cannot be guaranteed, the information using a small screwdriver. symbol and display show KEY BATTERY 2. Remove the cover. or LOW VOLTAGE CAR KEY - CHANGE 3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and BATTERY. (–) sides are fitted (there is a diagram under the cover). Changing the remote control key 4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid battery touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers. 5. Refit the cover and press it in. Dispose of the old battery in an environmentally-responsible manner. 05 G019406

If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals from the remote control key at a normal distance, the battery should be replaced (type CR 2450, 3 V).

133 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

Locking/unlocking the car from Rapid closing Locking/unlocking the car from inside outside Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on the For cars with the Keyless system, see remote control key's lock button to close all page 130. windows and sunroof* at the same time.

Unlocking Tailgate Using the remote control key's unlock button the car can be unlocked in two different ways Unlocking (select in personal settings, see page 85): Unlocking tailgate only: • One press unlocks the doors and the tail- Press the remote control key's button to gate unlock the tailgate. • One press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and Locking the tailgate. If the doors are locked when the tailgate is closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the

05 G007451 Locking remote control key's lock button or from inside The remote control key's lock button locks the to lock both doors and the tailgate. doors and tailgate simultaneously. With the central locking button on the driver's door, the doors and tailgate can be locked or Automatic relocking NOTE unlocked simultaneously. If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened The car can be locked even if the tailgate is within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked Unlocking open - when the tailgate is then closed there again automatically (does not apply to locking A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its is a risk that the keys will be locked in*. from inside). This function reduces the risk that lock button. the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For Press the upper section of the central lock- cars with alarm, see page 139.) WARNING ing button . Be aware that you can be locked in the car Global opening if it is locked from the outside with the remote control key. You cannot then leave Press the upper section of the central lock- the car using any of the controls inside the ing button . car.

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

A long press (at least 4 seconds) also • Pull one of the door handles twice Temporary deactivation opens all the side windows simultaneously • Press the upper section of the central lock- - for example, to quickly ventilate the pas- ing button and pull the door handle. senger compartment during hot weather. The function can be activated/deactivated by Locking means of personal preferences, see page 85. Press the lower section of the central lock- A ing button . Deadlocks *1 Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also When deadlocked, the doors cannot be close all windows and the sunroof* at the opened from the inside if they are locked with same time. the remote control key. All doors can be locked with each respective The deadlocks are activated with the remote door's lock button. control key and are set after a 10-25 second E B delay after the doors have been locked. D C Opening the doors 05 When the doors are locked from the inside: The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The driver's Pull the handle twice to unlock and open door can also be unlocked with the detachable the door. key blade.

Automatic locking G026307 When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the Active menu options are indicated with a cross. doors and tailgate are locked automatically. Display When the function is activated and the doors have been locked they can be opened in two MENU ways: EXIT

1 Only in combination with alarm.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135 05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

ENTER The next time the remote control key is turned to key position II the system is reset to zero and Navigation the instrument panel display shows the mes- If someone is going to stay in the car but the sage Full guard at which the deadlocks func- doors must be locked from the outside, then tion and the alarm's movement and tilt detec- the deadlocks function can be temporarily tors* are re-engaged. switched off. or This is carried out as follows: • If the locking system shall not be changed: 1. Access the menu system under Car Select no options at all and lock the car. Or settings (for a detailed description of the press EXIT and lock the car. menu system, see page 85). NOTE 2. Select Reduced guard. • Remember that the car's alarm is armed 3. Select Activate once: The instrument when the car is locked. 05 panel display shows the message Reduced guard - See manual and the • If any of the doors are opened from the deadlocks function is switched off when inside then the alarm will be triggered. the car is locked. or WARNING Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is Do not allow anyone to remain in the car turned to position 0 the audio system dis- without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. play shows the message Press ENTER to reduce guard until engine is started. EXIT to cancel - select one of the options: • If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Note that the alarm's* movement and tilt detectors are switched off at the same time, see page 139.

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

Manual select, child lock, rear doors Electrical locking of the rear doors and The lamp in the button illuminates when the power windows* lock is active.

NOTE Cars with electric child safety locks do not also have manual child locks. G014697 05 Manual child lock in left-hand rear door. The door cannot be opened from inside. Driver's door control panel. When the electric child safety lock is active The door can be opened from inside. then the rear: The child safety lock controls are found on the • windows can only be opened with the driv- trailing edge of the rear doors and are only er's door control panel accessible when the doors are open. • doors cannot be opened from inside. To activate or deactivate the child safety locks: 1. Child safety locks are activated in key posi- 1. Remove the remote control key's key tion I or II. blade. 2. Press the switch on the driver's door. 2. Turn the control using the key blade. A message appears on the information display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Alarm system Alarm indicator NOTE When the alarm is armed, it continually moni- Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm tors all alarm inputs. system components. All such attempts The alarm is triggered if: could affect the terms of insurance. • a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens • a non-approved key is used in the ignition Arming the alarm or if an attempt is made to force the lock Press the remote control key lock button. • a movement is detected in the passenger A long flash from the car's direction indi- compartment (if fitted with a movement cators confirms that the alarm is armed detector) and that the doors are locked. • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector) IMPORTANT

• the battery's cable is disconnected G020227 The alarm is fully armed when the car's 05 • anyone tries to disconnect the siren. direction indicators have made one long A red LED on the instrument panel indicates flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second. the alarm system's status: • LED not lit – the alarm is not armed. • The LED flashes once every other second Disarming the alarm – Alarm is armed. Press the remote control key unlock but- • The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc- alarm and until key position II is activated tion indicators confirm that the alarm is – the alarm has been triggered. disarmed and that the doors are unlocked. If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message appears on the display. At which point you should contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

Automatic re-arming of the alarm Remote control key not working Reduced alarm level This function prevents the car being left with To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm - alarm disarmed unintentionally. for example when leaving a dog in the car or during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt If the car is unlocked with the remote control detectors can be temporarily switched off. key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within The procedure is the same as with the tempo- 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 135 armed. The car is relocked at the same time. Testing the alarm system Deactivating a triggered alarm Testing the movement detector in the Press the unlock button on the remote control key or insert the key in the ignition passenger compartment switch. 1. Open all the windows.

G019420 2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is Confirmation is given by two short flashes from 05 the direction indicators. confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly. If for some reason the remote control key is not working, the alarm can still be switched off and 3. Please wait 30 seconds. Alarm signals the car started as follows: 4. Test the movement detector in the pas- When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. senger compartment, such as by lifting out pens: The alarm is triggered and the siren a bag from a seat. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash. • A siren sounds for less than 25 seconds. sounds. The siren has its own battery which is used 2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car if the car battery has insufficient charge or remove the knob by pressing in the with the remote control key. is disconnected. catch (1) and pulling out (2). Test of alarm for doors • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated. 3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition 1. Arm the alarm. switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The 2. Please wait 30 seconds. alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote control key is turned to key position II. 3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

4. Open one of the doors. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement detector. 2. Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote control key. 3. Please wait 30 seconds. 4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the 05 dashboard. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Locks and alarm

141 General...... 144 Refuelling...... 146 Alcoguard*...... 150 Starting the engine ...... 154 Starting the engine – Flexifuel...... 156 Keyless drive*...... 158 Manual gearbox...... 159 Automatic gearbox...... 160 Brake system...... 165 DSTC – Stability and traction control system* ...... 167 Park Assist*...... 169 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System ...... 171 Towing and recovery...... 174 Start assistance...... 176 Driving with a trailer...... 177 Towing equipment*...... 179 Detachable towbar* ...... 181 Loading...... 185 Adjusting headlamp pattern ...... 186

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING 06 Starting and driving

General

Economical driving WARNING • Clean the electric contacts of the electric Driving economically means driving smoothly engine block heater and trailer coupling Never switch off the engine while moving, after driving in water and mud. while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving such as downhill, this deactivates important style and speed to the prevailing conditions. systems such as the power steering and IMPORTANT • Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted brake servo. to the current traffic situation and road - Do not let the car stand with water over the lower engine speeds result in lower fuel sills for any long period of time. This could consumption. Driving in water cause electrical malfunctions. • Avoid driving with open windows. The car can be driven through water at a maxi- In the event of stalling in water, do not try to mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of restart. Tow the car from the water. • Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised and heavy braking. when passing through flowing water. • Remove unnecessary items from the car - Engine, gearbox and cooling system the greater the load the higher the fuel con- IMPORTANT Under special conditions, for example hard sumption. driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is Engine damage can occur if water enters • Use engine braking to slow down, when it the air filter. a risk that the engine and drive system may can take place without risk to other road overheat - in particular with a heavy load. users. In greater depths, water can enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability For supplementary information about over- • A roof load and ski box increase air resis- of the oils and shortens the service life of the heating when driving with a trailer - see 06 tance, leading to higher fuel consumption systems. page 177. - remove the load carriers when not in use. Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front Do not run the engine to operating tem- • • When driving in water, maintain a low speed of the grille when driving in hot climates. perature at idling speed, but rather drive and do not stop the car. When the water has with a light load as soon as possible - a • In the event of a risk of overheating a built- been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly cold engine consumes more fuel than a in protection function in the gearbox is acti- and check that full brake function is achieved. warm one. vated which, amongst other things, illumi- Water and mud for example can make the nates the instrument panel's yellow infor- For more information and further advice, see brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake mation lamp and there is a text message the pages 14 and 289. function. displayed there regarding appropriate action - follow the recommendation given.

144 06 Starting and driving

General

• If the temperature gauge for the engine's Do not overload the battery Slippery driving conditions cooling system goes into the red zone - The electrical functions in the car load the bat- Practise driving on slippery surfaces under stop and let the engine idle for a few tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the controlled conditions to learn how the car minutes. remote control key in key position II when the reacts. • If the car overheats, the air conditioning engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode may be switched off temporarily. - which uses less power. • Do not turn the engine off immediately you Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area stop after a hard drive. supplies power even when the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch. NOTE Also, be aware of different accessories that It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to load the electrical system. Do not use functions operate for a while after the engine has been which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. switched off. Examples of such functions are: ventilation fan Diesel engine 1.6D • When driving with a major load in a hot climate, • windscreen wiper the engine cooling fan can be replaced with • audio system (high volume) one of a greater capacity than the standard • headlamps. model. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer 06 regarding the options for your car. If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER SAVE MODE. The energy-saving function Open tailgate then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan WARNING and/or audio system. Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic In which case, charge the battery by star- exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car ting the engine and then running it for at through the cargo area. least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

145 06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

Opening the fuel filler flap 3. Take out the cap. General information on fuel 4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel filler flap. WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- NOTE ting fuel splashes in the eyes. Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard. contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Filling up with fuel Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel nozzle cuts out. are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal- NOTE lowed. Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot before refuelling! weather. WARNING Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the Fuel which spills on to the ground can be lighting panel, see page 63. The engine must Fuel of a lower quality than that specified 06 ignited by the exhaust fumes. be switched off before the flap can be opened. should not be used as engine power and fuel The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing. consumption could be negatively affected, for Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- more information see the following section ting to refuel. Closing Fuel. Never carry an activated mobile phone Push in the flap until you hear a click. when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, Fuel cap leading to fire and injury. 1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resistance is felt. 2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a stop.

146 06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

IMPORTANT tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel Bioethanol E85 to air directed to the engine is continuously Do not modify the fuel system or its compo- Mixing different types of fuel or the use of adjusted. These adjustments create optimal nents, and do not replace components with fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's conditions for efficient combustion of harmful guarantees, and any associated service parts that are not specifically designed for use agreement. This applies to all engines. emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide with bioethanol. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata- that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85). lytic converter. WARNING Methanol must not be used. A decal on the CO2 emissions, fuel consumption and tank vol- Petrol inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct ume, see page 289 Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most alternative fuel. engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, Catalytic converter The use of components not designed for 95 and 98 RON. bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury The purpose of the catalytic converter is to or engine damage. purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of • 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder exhaust gases close to the engine so that it engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines. quickly reaches operating temperature. The Reserve fuel can catalytic converter consists of a monolith • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol, (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- see the NOTE box, page 156. walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- formance and minimum fuel consumption. dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, IMPORTANT 06 i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- fuel with the highest possible octane rating is Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely ical reaction without being used up them- recommended for optimum performance and fastened and that its cap is sealed. selves. fuel economy. Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor WARNING The Lambda-sond is part of a control system IMPORTANT Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel • Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it economy. not to damage the catalytic converter. is refuelled with ethanol. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content • Do not use additives not recommended of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This by Volvo. value is fed into an electronic system that con-

147 06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

Diesel companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204 peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- diesel: cipitate. standards. 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and turn to key position II (see IMPORTANT IMPORTANT page 154). Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European Use special winter grade fuel during cold 2. Wait approx. 1 minute. diesel standard. months. 3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/ or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is key to start position III. IMPORTANT reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When Diesel type fuels which must not be used: refuelling, check that the area around the fuel Draining condensation from the fuel filter special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the The fuel filter separates condensation from the oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements gent and water. tion. in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals damage that is not covered by the Volvo IMPORTANT specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet warranty. The sulphur content must be a maximum of or if you suspect that the car has been filled 50 ppm. with contaminated fuel. 06 Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants, IMPORTANT such as excessively high volumes of sulphur Empty tank particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine Certain special additives remove the water well-known producers. Never use diesel of means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the separation in the fuel filter. dubious quality. tank may need to be vented in the workshop in At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin order to restart the engine after fuelling. Diesel particle filter (DPF) precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil- may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel vation, the fuel system needs a few moments ter, which results in more efficient emission fuel designed for low temperatures around to carry out a check. Do this before starting the control. The particles in the exhaust gases are freezing point is available from the major oil collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

148 06 Starting and driving

Refuelling called "regeneration" is started in order to burn way. The car should then be driven for approx- away the particles and empty the filter. This imately 20 minutes more. requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature. NOTE Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- A smaller reduction of engine power may be ically at an interval of approximately noticed temporarily during regeneration. 300 – 900 km depending on driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes 10 - 20 minutes. When regeneration is complete the message is It may take a little longer at a low average cleared automatically. speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration. IMPORTANT The rear window heating may be activated If the filter fills up it may be incapable of automatically to increase the load on the functioning. Then it can be difficult to start engine during regeneration without warning. the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced. Regeneration in cold weather If the car is frequently driven short distances in Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that cold weather then the engine does not reach the engine reaches normal operating tempera- normal operating temperature. This means that ture more quickly. regeneration of the diesel particle filter does 06 not take place and the filter is not emptied. When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow information symbol on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel display. Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motor-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard*

General information on the Alcolock Functions Operation The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the Battery car from being driven by individuals under the Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be tus: started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in Lamp (4) Battery status accordance with each market's limit value in Green flashing Charging in pro- force for driving legally. gress

WARNING Green Fully charged

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt Yellow Semi-charged the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and Red Discharged - fit the to drive the car safely. charger in the holder or connect the 1. Nozzle for breath test. power supply cable 2. Switch. from the glovebox. 3. Transmission button. 06 4. Lamp for battery status. NOTE 5. Lamp for result of breath test. Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test. keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

Before starting the engine The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard*

1. When indicator lamp (6) is green the Alco- Result after breath test To bear in mind lock is ready for use. Lamp (5) + Dis- Specification Before the breath test 2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If play text the Alcolock is outside the car when it is In order to obtain correct function and as accu- unlocked then it must first be activated Green lamp + Start the engine - no rate a measurement result as possible: with the switch (2). ALCOGUARD alcohol content • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath APPROVED TEST measured. 5 minutes before the breath test. and blow with an even pressure until a Avoid excess windscreen washing - the Yellow lamp + Engine starting pos- • "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an The result will be one of the alternatives in ALCOGUARD sible - measured incorrect measurement result. the following table Result after breath APPROVED TEST alcohol content is test. above 0.1 promille Change of driver but below the limit In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- 4. If no message is shown then the transmis- A sion to the car may have failed - in which value in force . ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) case, press button (3) to transmit the result Red lamp + DISAP- Engine starting not to the car manually. simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At PROVED TEST possible - measured which point the car returns to start inhibition 5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock WAIT 1 MINUTE alcohol content is in its holder. mode and a new approved breath test is above the limit value required before starting the engine. 6. Start the engine following an approved in forceA. breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it Calibration and service 06 A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply. must be repeated. See also the section entitled General information on the The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated Alcolock on page 150 at a workshop1 every 12 months. NOTE 30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR. After a completed period of driving, the REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried out engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test. within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard*

Bypass function will then be possible, see In extremely cold weather the heating time can Activating the Bypass function page 152 section Emergency situation. be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors. • Depress and hold the left-hand stalk The message can be cleared by pressing the switch READ button and the button for Emergency situation hazard warning flashers simultaneously for send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on In the event of an emergency situation, or if the approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- Alcolock is out of order or has been removed, BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE pears each time the engine is started - only it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to 1 and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS recalibration at a workshop can clear the mes- drive the car. ENABLED - after which the engine can be sage permanently. started. NOTE Cold or hot weather This function can be activated several times. The colder the weather the longer it takes All Bypass activation is logged and saved in The error message shown during driving can memory, see page 12 in the section, before the Alcolock is ready for use: only be cleared at a workshop1. Recording data. Activating the Emergency function Depress and hold the left-hand stalk Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat- After the Bypass function has been activated • switch READ button and the button for ing time (sec- the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS onds) hazard warning flashers simultaneously for ENABLED the whole time while driving and approx. 5 seconds - the display shows 1 +10 — +85 10 can only be reset by a workshop . ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and The Bypass function can be tested without the the engine can be started. –5 — +10 60 06 error message being logged - in which case, This function can be used once, after which a –40 — –5 180 carry out all the steps without starting the car. reset must be made at a workshop1. The error message is cleared when the car is At temperatures below -20 ºC or above locked. +60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power When the Alcolock is installed, either the supply. The display shows ALCOGUARD Bypass or Emergency function is selected as INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con- the bypassing option. This setting can be nect the power supply cable from the glovebox changed afterwards at a workshop1. and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard*

Symbols and display messages Display text Meaning/Action In addition to the previously described messages, the combined instrument panel's dis- ALCOGUARD Blowing too weak - play can also show the following: BLOW HARDER blow harder. ALCOGUARD Heating not finished Display text Meaning/Action WAIT PREHEAT- - wait for text ALCOGUARD The engine has been ING ALCOGUARD RESTART POSSI- switched off for less BLOW 5 SEC- BLE than 30 minutes - ONDS. engine starting possible without new test.

ALCOGUARD Contact a work- SERVICE shop1. REQUIRED

ALCOGUARD NO Transmission failed - SIGNAL send manually with button (3) or take a 06 new breath test.

ALCOGUARD Test failed - take a INVALID TEST new breath test.

ALCOGUARD Blowing too short - BLOW LONGER blow for longer.

ALCOGUARD Blowing too hard - BLOW SOFTER blow more gently.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine NOTE Turn the ignition key to the start position Apply the parking brake. III and just release it - the starter motor The idling speed can be noticeably higher then works automatically until the engine Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock than normal for certain engine types during has started. then a breath test must first be approved cold starting. This is in order that the emis- before the engine can be started, see sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which NOTE page 150. minimises exhaust emissions and protects If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold the environment. Automatic gearbox without waiting for engine preheating, then Move the gear selector in position P or N. the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds. Manual gearbox Starting the engine Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch Petrol Key positions pedal fully depressed. This is particularly Turn the remote control key to key position important in very cold conditions. III. If the engine does not start within 0 – Locked position 5–10 seconds, release the key and try The steering lock is activated WARNING again. when the remote control key Never remove the remote control key from is removed from the ignition Diesel the ignition switch while driving or when the switch. car is being towed. The steering lock could 1. Turn the remote control key to key position 06 otherwise be activated, making it impossi- II. ble to steer the car. > An indicator symbol in the combined The remote control key must be in key posi- instrument panel shows that engine pre- I – Radio position tion II when the car is being towed. heating is underway, see page 55. Steering lock deactivated. 2. Turn the ignition key to position III when Certain functions can be the indicator symbol goes out. used. The engine's electrical system is not activated. Autostart * With the autostart function, there is no need to hold the remote control key (or ignition dial on cars with Keyless Drive, see page 130) in key position III until the engine has started.

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

II – Driving position 2. Hold the steering wheel in this position. The remote control key's Reinsert the key and make a new attempt position when driving. The to start the car. whole electrical system is engaged. WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would III – Start position be activated, making it impossible to steer The starter motor is activated. the car. The remote control key is released when the engine has started and then springs back WARNING to drive position. Always remove the remote control key from A ticking sound can be heard the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car. if the key reaches an intermediate position - in which case, turn the key to position II and back to get rid of the sound. Remote control keys and electronic immobiliser When the steering lock is activated 06 If the front wheels are positioned so that there The remote control key must not hang with is tension in the steering lock then the infor- other keys or metal objects on the same key mation display may show a warning message ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti- and the car cannot be started. In which case, vated accidentally. proceed as follows: 1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch and turn the steering wheel so that the tension is released.

155 06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine – Flexifuel

General information about starting If the engine still does not start bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should with Flexifuel Please wait for one minute, fully depress be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick The engine is started in the same way as in a the accelerator pedal and repeat the pre- starting of the engine. petrol-engined car, see page 154. vious procedure. The lower the temperature, the longer the time required with the engine block heater. At NOTE IMPORTANT -20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3 hours. The immobiliser is activated in the event of If the engine does not start despite repeated repeated start attempts. Before a new start start attempts, contact a workshop - an Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine authorised Volvo workshop is recom- attempt is made the key/dial must first be block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre- mended. turned back to position I or 0. heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For this reason you should aim to use the engine In the event of starting difficulties Engine block heater* block heater throughout the winter months. If the engine does not start at the first start attempt, proceed as follows: WARNING 1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2. The engine block heater is powered by high 2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec- key position III. tric engine block heater and its electrical 06 connections must only be carried out by a 3. When the engine has started, ease the workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop accelerator pedal gradually as the engine is recommended. speed increases.

If the engine has not started after 10 seconds, second attempt Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to key position III until the engine starts, but not longer than 60 seconds. Electrical input to the engine block heater. When the temperature is expected to be lower than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine – Flexifuel

NOTE IMPORTANT Points to remember for carrying reserve After the fuel mixture in the tank has been fuel: changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 • In the event of stalling due to an empty minutes. fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided If the battery has been discharged or discon- by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 nected then a slightly longer period of driving octane petrol. is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared. For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol E85 fuel, see page 147.

Fuel adaptation If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is important to allow the engine to accustom itself 06 (adapt) to the new fuel mixture. Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.

157 06 Starting and driving

Keyless drive*

General Starting the car Starting with the remote control key Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with automatic gearbox).

Petrol engine Press in and turn the ignition dial to key position III. Diesel engine 1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel goes out, see page 55.

G019410 2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to G019420 position III. The keyless drive system allows the car to be If the remote control key's battery is dis- unlocked, driven and locked without the need charged then the Keyless Drive function does for a key, see page 130. not work. In which case, start the car by using the remote control key as ignition dial. 06 The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the same way as the remote control key. One pre- 1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial. condition for starting the car is that the car's 2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition remote control key is located inside the pas- switch. senger compartment or the cargo area. 3. Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and start in the same way as with the ignition dial.

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

Gear positions Gear shift indicator - GSI* GSI - Gear Shift Indicator - advises the driver of the optimum time to change gear. The indication is given with an arrow for up and down shifting respectively in the lower information display of the combined instrument panel, see page 53.

Reverse gear inhibitor The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox. • Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox. The 6-speed box is available in two versions - tionary. reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted NOTE on the gear lever. With the upper variant of the shifting pattern 06 Depress the clutch pedal fully during each • for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra- gear change. tion) - first press down the gear lever in the • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between N position in order to engage reverse gear. gear changes.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

Geartronic automatic gear positions NOTE Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-) The driver can also change gear manually The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The the P position. car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released. The gearbox is mechanically blocked when Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the P position is engaged. Always apply the the lever to the side from position D to the end parking brake when parking the car. position at +/–. The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 – R – Reverse 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is The car must be stationary when position R is engaged just then, see page 53. selected. • Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) N – Neutral to change up a gear and release it, the lever G018264 No gear is engaged and the engine can be returns to its rest position between + and –. D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear started. Apply the parking brake when the car positions. is stationary with the gear selector in posi- or tion N. The information display shows the position of • Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to the gear selector using the following indica- change down a gear and release it. 06 NOTE tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be page 53. The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from selected at any time while driving. P – Parking position the N position if the car has been stationary Geartronic automatically shifts down if the for more than 3 seconds. Select position P when you wish to start the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than engine or park the car. a level suitable for the selected gear, in order D – Drive to avoid jerking and stalling. IMPORTANT D is the normal driving position. The car auto- To return to automatic driving mode: matically shifts up and down depending on the The car must be stationary when position level of acceleration and speed. The car must • Move the lever to the side to the end posi- is selected. P be stationary when the gear selector is moved tion at D. to position D from position R.

160 06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

Kick-down Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Automatic gear selector inhibitor When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the Cars with an automatic gearbox have special way to the floor (beyond the position normally safety systems: regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- Keylock down. To remove the remote control key, the gear selector must be in the P position. The key is If the accelerator is released from the kick- locked in all other positions. down position, the gearbox automatically changes up. Parking position (P) Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- Stationary car with engine running: tion is needed, such as for overtaking. Hold your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- Safety function tion. To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox G020237 control program has a protective downshift Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- The gear selector can be moved forward and position (P position) tion. back freely between N and D. Other positions To be able to move the gear selector from the Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- are locked with a latch that is released with the P position to other gear positions, the remote down which would result in an engine speed inhibitor button on the gear selector. control key must be in position II and the brake 06 high enough to damage the engine. Nothing pedal must be depressed. With the inhibitor button depressed the lever happens if the driver still tries to shift down in can be moved forwards or backwards between this way at high engine speed – the original Shiftlock – Neutral (N position) P, R, N and D. gear remains engaged. If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least three sec- When kick-down is activated the car can onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- change one or more gears at a time depending ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N on engine speed. The car changes up when the position. engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine. To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II.

161 06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor Cold start Automatic gearbox, Powershift * 1 When starting in low temperatures, the gear changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low temperatures. To reduce engine emissions, the gearbox shifts up later than normal when the engine is started at low temperatures.

NOTE Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types. G018263 G018264

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear In certain cases, it may be necessary to move positions. the car when it is not driveable, for example if the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in 06 the car: contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. 1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on A conventional automatic gearbox has a the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear hydraulic torque converter that transfers power edge. from the engine to the gearbox. 2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote Powershift transmission operates in the same control key. way and has similar controls and functions as 3. Hold the key blade down and at the same the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- time move the gear lever out of the P posi- bed in the previous section. tion.

1 Only on the 4-cyl. 2.0 and 2.0D models.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

To bear in mind Overheating during slow driving in queues can Text message and action The transmission's double clutch has overload be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car In some situations the display can show a mes- protection that is activated if it becomes too and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi- hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the there is a moderate distance to the traffic nated. accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then The table shows three steps with an increased long time. wait another moment with your foot on the degree of seriousness should the gearbox brake pedal. Overheated transmission causes the car to become too hot. In parallel with the display text shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- the driver is also advised that the car's elec- minates and the information display shows a IMPORTANT tronics are temporarily changing the driving message. The transmission can also overheat Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary characteristics. Follow the instructions on the during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car information display where appropriate. slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox hitched. The transmission cools down when could then overheat. the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.

163 06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station- HOLD stant engine speed. ary using the foot brakeA.

TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.

TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the message clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

NOTE WARNING For more possible display messages with their 06 respective proposals for solutions concerning The table's examples are no indication that If a warning symbol combined with the text automatic transmission, see page 58. the car is defective but instead show that a TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY is safety function has been activated inten- ignored then the heat in the gearbox may A display text clears automatically after the tionally to prevent damage to one of the become so high that the power transmis- action has been carried out or after one press car's components. sion between engine and gearbox is tem- on the indicator stalk READ button. porarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.

164 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Brake servo Dampness can affect braking Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an If the car is rolling or is being towed with the characteristics additional load on the car's brakes. engine turned off, the brake pedal must be Brake components become wet when the car depressed about 5 times harder than when the is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water Anti-lock braking system - ABS or when the car is washed. This may alter brake engine is running. If the brake pedal is The anti-lock braking system pad friction characteristics so that there is a depressed when the engine is started, you will (ABS) prevents the wheels from delay before braking effect is noticed. feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to locking up during braking. the brake servo becoming active. This may be Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time This means the ability to steer is more noticeable if the car has Emergency if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a Brake Assistance (EBA). snow, as well as after setting off in very damp hazard for example. or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads WARNING and dries off any water. This precaution is also After the engine has been started, the ABS will The brake servo only works when the engine recommended before parking the car for a long perform a brief self-test at a speed of is running. period in such weather conditions. about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as pulses in the brake pedal.

NOTE If the brakes are used heavily To get the most out of the ABS: When driving in the Alps or other roads with If braking with the engine switched off, 1. Depress the brake pedal with full force. similar characteristics, the car's brakes are press the brake pedal sharply once, not Pulses will be felt. repeatedly. heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not 06 being depressed especially hard. 2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do not release the pressure on the pedal. Because speed is often low, the brakes are not Brake circuits cooled as effectively as when driving on flat Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf- This symbol illuminates if a brake roads at higher speed. fic-free area and in different weather condi- circuit is not working. tions. So as not to overload the brakes, shift down If a fault should occur in one of the when driving downhill instead of using the foot The ABS symbol illuminates for 2 seconds if circuits, it is still possible to brake brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as there was a fault in the ABS system when the the car. The brake pedal will travel further and you would use driving uphill. This uses engine engine was last running. may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure braking more efficiently so the foot brake is on the pedal is needed to produce the normal only required for brief periods. braking effect.

165 06 Starting and driving

Brake system

Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA NOTE For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- Assist) provides full-strength braking instanta- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) neously. The EBA function senses when heavy the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the braking is underway by registering how quickly brake pedal is released then all braking the brake pedal is depressed. ceases. Continue braking without easing off on the brake pedal. The function disengages when Emergency brake lights and automatic the pressure on the brake pedal eases. hazard warning flashers This function is always active. It cannot be dis- Emergency brake lights are activated to alert engaged. vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with WARNING a constant glow. If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a Emergency brake lights are activated at fault in the brake system. If the level in the speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, working and/or in the event of sudden braking. drive carefully to the nearest workshop and After the car's speed has been slowed below 06 have the brake system checked - an author- 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to ised Volvo workshop is recommended. the normal constant glow - while at the same If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the time the hazard warning flashers are activated, brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further and they flash until the driver changes engine before topping up the brake fluid. speed with the accelerator pedal or they are The reason for the loss of brake fluid must deactivated with their button, see page 74. be investigated.

166 06 Starting and driving

DSTC – Stability and traction control system*

General Spin Control The stability system is activated automatically The stability and traction control system, STC/ The function prevents the driving wheels from each time the car is started. DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) spinning against the road surface during accel- System operation during skidding and accel- helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves eration. eration can be partially deactivated. Operation the car's traction. Traction control system during skidding is then delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking The function is active at low speed and trans- for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or or acceleration when the system is in action. fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- sand is improved at the same time as acceler- The car may accelerate slower than expected ning to the one that is not. when the accelerator pedal is depressed. ation is no longer limited.

The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC Reduced operation Operation depending on market. The table shows the 1. Turn thumbwheel until the STC/DSTC integral functions of the respective systems. menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the system function Function/system STC DSTC is unchanged. Active Yaw Control X DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that system operation is reduced. Spin Control X X 2. Press and hold the RESET button until the Traction control sys- X X STC/DSTC menu is changed. 06 tem The system remains reduced until the driver reactivates it or until the engine is Active Yaw Control switched off - after the engine is started the The function limits the driving and brake force next time DSTC is back in its normal mode G029057 of the wheels individually in order to stabilise again. the car. Thumbwheel1 RESETbutton 1

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 06 Starting and driving

DSTC – Stability and traction control system*

WARNING Symbols in the combined instrument panel Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car. STC/DSTC system

NOTE DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on Information the display each time the engine is started.

Messages on the information display TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY If the symbols and are displayed at the OFF means that the system has been tempo- same time: Read the message on the informa- rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera- tion display. ture. If the symbol appears alone then it may The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled. appear as follows: ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system • Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC system is now being activated. 06 disabled due to a fault. Constant glow for two seconds means • Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the system check when the engine is started. engine. • Constant glow after starting the engine or > If the message remains when the engine while driving means that there is a fault in is restarted, drive to a workshop. An the STC/DSTC system. authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

General information on parking • Rear only. Limitations assistance • Both front and rear. The system must be deactivated when reversing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar Function or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier The frequency of the signal increases the would trigger the sensors. shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. If the volume of another NOTE audio source from the audio system is high, then this is automatically lowered. Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo The tone becomes constant at a distance of genuine trailer cable is used. about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this distance both behind and in front of the car, the signal alternates between left and right-hand Parking assistance both front and rear speakers.

Rear parking assistance only Parking assistance front and rear. The system is automatically engaged when the Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. car is started. A signal indicates the distance to a detected Rear parking assistance is activated when 06 obstacle. reverse gear is engaged and the message Park Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on WARNING the audio system display. Parking assistance does not relinquish the If the system is switched off, the display shows driver's own responsibility during parking. Park Assist deactivated Enter to activate The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change dren or animals near the car. the settings, see page 85. Button for Off/On (button location depends on The distance covered behind the car is other selected equipment). Variants about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the Parking assistance is available in two variants: rear loudspeakers.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

The system is automatically engaged when the Fault indicator Cleaning the sensors car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is If the information symbol illumi- illuminated. If parking assistance is switched nates with constant glow and the off with the button, the lamp goes out. display shows PARK ASSIST SERVICE REQUIRED then park- Front ing assistance is disengaged. For Front parking assistance is active at speeds attention, contact a workshop - an authorised below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at Volvo workshop is recommended. higher speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated. IMPORTANT The distance covered to the front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- front comes from the front loudspeakers. nals that are caused by external sound Limitations sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- Front parking assistance cannot be combined quencies that the system works with. with extra lights because the sensors are affec- Examples of such sources include horns, Parking assistance sensors. wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and ted by the extra lights. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. Rear ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo. 06 Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged. NOTE The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may behind comes from the rear loudspeakers. cause incorrect warning signals. Limitations See the previous section Rear parking assistance only.

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

General BLIS is an information system that under cer- Blind spots tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direction in the so-called "blind spot". The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways. BLIS is based on camera technology. The cameras (1) are located under the door mirrors. When a camera has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illuminates with a constant glow.

G020295 NOTE Rearview mirror with BLIS system. The lamp illuminates on the side of the car A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m. BLIS camera where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the When BLIS operates Indicator lamp same time then both lamps illuminate. The system operates when the car is driven at 06 BLIS symbol a speed above 10 km/h. BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- Overtaking WARNING tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS The system is designed to react if you overtake The system is a supplement to, not a indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h replacement for, a safe driving style and use in the information display. In such cases, check faster than the other vehicle. of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system The system is designed to react if you are over- the driver's attention and responsibility. The can be switched off temporarily by pressing the taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h responsibility for changing lanes safely BLIS button see page 172. always rests with the driver. faster than your vehicle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 06 Starting and driving

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

WARNING Activating/deactivating ton to clear the text message. For more information on messages, see page 58. BLIS does not work in sharp bends. BLIS does not work when the car is revers- BLIS system message ing. Text on the dis- Specification A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal play other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from BLIS ON The BLIS system is being detected by BLIS. activated.

BLIS REDUCED Reduced function in Daylight and darkness FUNCTION data transmission In daylight the system reacts to the shape of between the BLIS the surrounding vehicles. The system is system's camera designed to detect motor vehicles such as and the car's electri- cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles. cal system. In darkness the system reacts to the head- Button for Off/On (button location depends on other selected equipment). The camera resets lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with itself when the data headlamps that are switched off are not BLIS is activated when the engine is started. transmission detected by the system. This means for exam- The indicator lamps in the door panels flash between the BLIS 06 ple that the system does not react to a trailer three times when BLIS is activated. system's camera without headlamps which is towed behind a The system can be deactivated/activated by and the car's electri- car or truck. pressing the BLIS button. cal system returns to normal. WARNING When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button goes out and a text message is shown on the BLIS CAMERA One or both cam- The system does not react to cyclists or dashboard display. BLOCKED eras blocked - clean moped riders. When BLIS is activated the light in the button the lenses. The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see illuminates, a new text message is shown on as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong the display and the indicator lamps in the door oncoming light or thick fog. panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

Text on the dis- Specification Limitations play In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle BLIS SERVICE Blind spot syst. dis- within the blind spot. REQUIRED engaged - contact a workshop. NOTE G018177 BLIS OFF The BLIS system is If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- deactivated. lated occasions despite there being no Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. other vehicle within the blind spot then this noise barrier or concrete road surface. does not mean that a fault has arisen in the IMPORTANT system. In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the Repair of the BLIS system components display shows the text BLIS SERVICE must only be performed by a workshop - an . authorised Volvo workshop is recom- REQUIRED mended. Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if Cleaning there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. Low sun in the camera. In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- 06 era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.

IMPORTANT The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away Reflection from shiny wet road surface. from the lenses.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

Start assistance WARNING IMPORTANT Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged The steering lock remains in the position it Note that the car must always be towed with and the engine does not start. Do not tow the was in when the power was cut off. The the wheels rolling forward. car to bump start the engine, see page 176. steering lock must be unlocked before towing. • Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or IMPORTANT The remote control key must be in position further than 80 km. Bump starting the car can damage the cat- II. Never remove the key from the ignition alytic converter. switch while driving or when the car is being towed. Automatic gearbox, Powershift The 2.0 and 2.0D models with Powershift auto- Towing matic transmission should not be towed as the NOTE transmission is dependent on the engine run- Find out the highest legal speed for towing ning in order to receive sufficient lubrication. before towing the car. If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- 1. Turn the remote control key to position II tery before towing can be started. IMPORTANT and unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered, see page 155. Avoid towing. WARNING 2. The ignition key must remain in position II • However, the car can be towed for a The brake servo and power steering do not short distance at low speed to move it while the car is being towed. 06 work when the engine is switched off. The from a dangerous position - not further 3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently brake pedal must be pressed about five than 10 km and not faster than depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent times harder than normal, and the steering 10 km/h. Note that the car must always jerks. will be considerably heavier than normal. be towed with the wheels rolling forward. Manual gearbox • In the event of moving a longer distance Move gear lever into neutral and release than 10 km, the car must be transported the parking brake. with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recom- Automatic gearbox, Geartronic mended. Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

174 06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

Move the gear selector to position N and • Open the variant with a recess using a NOTE release the parking brake. coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing cover completely and remove it. eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. Towing eye In which case, secure the tow rope in the • The second variant has a marking along towbar. one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the oppo- For this reason it is advisable to store the site side/corner at the same time using towbar's towball in the car, see page 179. a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed. Recovery Screw the towing eye right in up to its Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench. The car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place. IMPORTANT Finish by refitting the cover onto the Cars with automatic gearbox must only be bumper. towed with drive wheels raised from the road. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded IMPORTANT 06 socket behind a cover on the right-hand side The towing eye is only designed for towing of the bumper, front or rear. on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for Fitting the towing eye recovery assistance. Take out the towing eye (1) that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:

175 06 Starting and driving

Start assistance

Starting with a donor battery 3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch WARNING off the engine in the other car and ensure that the cars do not touch one another. The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which 4. Connect the red jump lead between the can be generated if you connect the jump positive terminal on the donor battery (1+) leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the and the positive terminal in your car (2+). battery explode. 5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to The battery contains sulphuric acid, which the donor battery's negative terminal (3-). can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush 6. Connect the other end of the black jump with large quantities of water. lead to the earthing point (4–) by the left- If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical hand strut tower. attention immediately. 7. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle 1500 rpm. If the battery in the car has become flat, you 8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat- can "borrow" electric current from either a sep- tery. arate battery or from another car. Always make 9. Remove the jump leads, first the black and 06 sure the crocodile clips on the jump leads are then the red. attached securely to eliminate sparks during the start attempt. Make sure that none of the clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with When jump starting the car, the following steps the battery's positive terminal or the clamp are recommended to avoid risk of explosion: connected to the red jump lead. 1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0. IMPORTANT 2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt. Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

176 06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

General • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is WARNING Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km. Follow the stated recommendations for total of the weight of the passengers and all trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's • The brakes are loaded much more than may be difficult to control in the event of payload by a corresponding weight. For more usual on long and steep downhill slopes. sudden movement and braking. detailed information on weights, see Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your page 281. speed. Manual gearbox If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%. Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with Overheating For safety reasons, the maximum permit- the necessary equipment for driving with a • When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer. climate there may be a risk of overheating. trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the • The car's towing bracket must be of an regulations in force for the permitted • Do not run the engine at higher revolutions approved type. speeds and weights. than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a • Maintain a low speed when driving with a - otherwise the oil temperature may Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped trailer up long, steep ascents. become too high. for driving with a trailer. Diesel engine 5-cyl • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the Trailer weights • If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru- weight on the towing bracket follows the ment panel will display a text message specified maximum towball load. For information on Volvo's permitted trailer which recommends switching to a lower 06 weights, see page 281. • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- gear - follow the recommendation given. mended pressure for a full load. For tyre • In the event of a risk of overheating the pressure decal location, see page 194. NOTE optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 • Clean the towing bracket regularly and The stated maximum permitted trailer rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant. grease the towball1. weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit • The engine is loaded more heavily than trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be usual when driving with a trailer. certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.

177 06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

Automatic gearbox hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake. Overheating • Block the wheels with chocks when park- When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill. climate there may be a risk of overheating. • An automatic gearbox selects the optimum Starting on a hill gear related to load and engine speed. 1. Depress the foot brake. 2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- Steep inclines tion D. • Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope 3. Release the parking brake. with" - it is not always a good idea to drive 4. Release the foot brake and start driving off. at a high gear with low engine revolutions.

IMPORTANT See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 163. 06 Parking on a hill 1. Depress the foot brake. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Move the gear selector to parking position P. 4. Release the foot brake. • Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a

178 06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

Towbar Storing the towbar Trailer cable If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see page 181.

WARNING If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar: • Follow the installation instructions carefully. • The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off. G031118 • Check that the indicator window shows G014589 green. Towbar storage space. An adapter is required if the car's towing IMPORTANT bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has Important checks 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved • The towbar's towball must be cleaned and Always remove the towbar after use and by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag 06 greased regularly. store it in the appointed location in the car, on the ground. firmly fastened with its strap. NOTE If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the towball.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

Specifications G010387 G010388 G010393

Dimensions for mounting points (mm) A B C D E F G H I J K

06 Fixed towbar standard 1115 81 113 Fixed towbar with Nivomat 1111 76 964 482 40 141 542 150 100 140 Detachable towbar standard 1115 81 63 Detachable towbar with Nivomat 1111 77

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

Fitting the towbar G020301 G020302 G017317 2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the 3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows 1. Remove the protective cover by first press- unlocked position by turning the key clock- red. If the window does not show red, ing in the catch and then pulling the wise. press in and turn the locking wheel anti- cover straight back . clockwise until you hear a click. 06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

5. Check that the indicator window shows green. G020304 G020309

4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click. 7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling

G020307 it up, down and back.

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- WARNING 06 tion. Remove the key from the lock. If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry. G020306

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

Removing the towbar G020310 G020312 G020301 8. Safety cable. 2. Push in the locking wheel and turn it 1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the anticlockwise until you hear a click. WARNING unlocked position. Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place. 06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar* G020314 G017318

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it 4. Push on the protective cover. comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward. 06 WARNING Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 179.

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Starting and driving

General • Heavy objects should be placed as low as Load carriers* Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a To avoid damaging the car and for maximum total of the weight of the passengers and all lowered backrest. possible safety while driving, it is recom- accessories reduces the car's payload by a • Cover sharp edges with something soft to mended to use load carriers specially designed corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- avoid damaging the upholstery or the glass for your car by Volvo. mation on weights, see page 281. surface of the tailgate. Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup- • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- plied with the carriers. WARNING lets with straps or web lashings. • Check periodically that the load carriers The car's driving characteristics change WARNING and load are properly secured. Lash the depending on how heavily it is loaded and load securely with retaining straps. how the load is distributed. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a Distribute the load evenly over the load frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry • the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the Loading the cargo area bottom. Stop the engine and apply the parking brake • The size of the area exposed to the wind, when loading or unloading long objects. The WARNING and therefore fuel consumption, increase gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out Never load cargo above the backrest. with the load's size. of position by long loads, which could set the The protection provided by the inflatable • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, car in motion. curtain in the headlining may be compro- heavy braking and hard cornering. 06 To increase the size of the cargo area, the head mised or eliminated by high loads. restraints can be removed and the seats folded Always secure the load. During heavy brak- WARNING down, see page 118. ing the load may otherwise shift, causing The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- injury to the car's occupants. racteristics are altered by roof loads. Place the load firmly against the backrest in front. • The head rests can be removed so that they are not damaged. • Put wide loads in the centre.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

Correct light pattern for left or right- Halogen headlamps Headlamps with Active Bending Lights hand traffic G021421 G021422 G020317 Left-hand traffic. Left-hand traffic. Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic. Right-hand traffic. Right-hand traffic. Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic. 06 The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a WARNING control in each headlamp housing to avoid On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head- dazzling oncoming motorists. lamp replacement must be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop The correct pattern will also better illuminate is recommended. The lamp must be han- the verge. dled with extreme caution because it is equipped with a high voltage unit.

186 06 Starting and driving

187 General...... 190 Tyre pressure...... 194 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 195 Changing wheels...... 197 Emergency puncture repair* ...... 199

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TYRES 07 Wheels and tyres

General

Driving characteristics and tyres Speed ratings New tyres The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha- The car is approved as a whole, which means racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre that dimensions and speed ratings must not pressure and speed rating are important for differ from those specified on the vehicle reg- how the car performs. istration document. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the with metal studs and those without). If such a same type and dimensions, and preferably also tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster the same make, are fitted to all four wheels. than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, Follow the recommended tyre pressures class Q can be driven at a maximum of specified on the tyre pressure label, see 160 km/h). page 194. Remember that traffic regulations determine Designation of dimensions how fast a car can be driven, not the speed class of the tyres. The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example: 205/55R16 91 W. Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated. Tyres are perishable. After a few years they 205 Tyre width (mm) Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. 55 Ratio between tyre wall height and T 190 km/h For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as tyre width (%) possible when you replace them. This is espe- H 210 km/h cially important with regard to winter tyres. The R Radial ply V 240 km/h last four digits in the sequence mean the week 16 Rim diameter in inches (") and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's 07 W 270 km/h DOT marking (Department of Transportation), 91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg) and this is stated with four digits, for example Y 300 km/h 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- W Speed rating for maximum permitted tured in week 15 of 2010. speed (in this case 270 km/h). Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged.

190 07 Wheels and tyres

General

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom- wards in a straight line rather than having the tyres with little tread depth provide very poor pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- grip in rain and snow. The function can therefore be affected due to sible complete loss of control over the car. This the tyre's constituent materials being broken is why it is important for the rear wheels never Winter tyres down. In such a case the tyre should then not to lose grip before the front wheels. be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are up, and not standing up. of external signs which indicate that the tyre is dependent on engine variant. When driving on unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration. winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four Tyres with tread wear indicators wheels. The age of the tyre can be determined by the DOT marking, see previous illustration. NOTE Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo More even wear and maintenance dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types The correct tyre pressure results in more even are most suitable. wear, see page 194. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how Studded tyres quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear 500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- be switched with each other. A suitable dis- cially the studs, a longer service life. tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km

and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- G020323 NOTE mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain Tread wear indicators. The legal provisions for the use of studded 07 about tread depth. If significant differences in Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless tyres vary from country to country. wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) bands across the width of the tread. On the between tyres have already occurred, the least side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Tread depth worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- Understeer is normally easier to correct than to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height peratures place considerably higher demands oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for- with the tread wear indicators. Change to new on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

191 07 Wheels and tyres

General

recommended not to drive on winter tyres that IMPORTANT have a tread depth of less than 4 mm. The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to Snow chains 110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively. Snow chains may only be used on the front Overtightening can damage the nuts and wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive the bolts. cars. Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1) Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow Steel rims are normally mounted with the chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari- wears out both the snow chains and tyres. ety may also be used. WARNING WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose. tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of Standard wheel nuts. uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The Bulge acorn wheel nut with fixed washer. Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident. There are two types of wheel nut, depending (2) on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with aluminium. aluminium rims. These differ markedly from other nut types as they have a rotating conical Rims and wheel nuts 1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110 washer. Only use wheel rims that are tested and Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to approved by Volvo and which are included in 130 Nm. 07 the Volvo genuine accessories range. NOTE 2. Check the torque with a torque wrench. These nuts may also be used with steel rims.

Locking wheel nuts Locking wheel nuts can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking

192 07 Wheels and tyres

General wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel IMPORTANT be switched between front and rear positions, covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun- never between left and right-hand sides, or ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise The car must never be driven fitted with vice versa. the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim. more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force NOTE Summer and winter wheels rain, snow and slush out of the way are Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm. adversely affected. Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to Spare wheel Temporary Spare* decrease the risk of skidding). The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be Volvo recommends that you contact an author- replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are sible. The car's handling may be altered by the uncertain about tread depth. use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the G020325 same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre When summer and winter wheels are changed, see page 197, the wheels should be marked pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the 07 tyre pressure table, see page 290. with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres IMPORTANT with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rota- Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare tion marked with an arrow. wheel on the car. The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

Recommended tyre pressure NOTE Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Even after several kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So air must not be released if the pressure is checked when the tyres are warm. While the pressure must be increased if it is too low. Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel consumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre

G020791 pressure that is too low can also result in the tyres overheating and disintegrating. The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door For information on the correct tyre pressure, pillar shows which pressures the tyres should refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified have at different load and speed conditions. tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold • Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- tyre size ture as the ambient temperature.) • ECO pressure1 Fuel economy, ECO pressure • Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare). At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre 07 pressure for maximum load is recommended Checking the tyre pressure in order to obtain optimum fuel economy. Check the tyre pressure regularly. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

194 07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

Warning triangle

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning Spare wheel* and jack * NOTE triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to the traffic. The car's original jack* Volvo recommends only using the jack* that The original jack must only be used for chang- belongs to the car model in question, which 1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be is indicated on the jack's label. angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and The label also indicates the jack's maximum the warning triangle from the case. wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting 2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs. height. cargo area. 07 Ensure the warning triangle and its case are firmly secured in the cargo area after use. Taking out the spare wheel 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward. 2. Release the spare wheel and lift it out. 3. Take out the jack* plus crank and the wheel wrench*.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into First aid* the cargo area A case with first aid equipment is located in the 1. Crank the jack (3) to halfway in order that cargo area. the jack shall fit horizontally in the bracket. 2. Fold in the handle (6) and place the wheel wrench (2) on the jack. 3. Put the jack (3) back in the hole on the right (4). Fasten the spare wheel (1) in the hole on the left (5).

Tools - returning into place Tools and jack* must be returned into place in the correct manner after use. • For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked so that it fits into the spare wheel. • For cars equipped with emergency puncture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.

IMPORTANT 07 The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

Removing wheels NOTE Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label. The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel wrench* that are located under the carpet in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see page 215. 2. Apply the parking brake and engage G020332

G020331 reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox. WARNING Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the changed at a busy location. Make sure that the Never position anything between the wheels which will remain on the ground. car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface. ground and the jack, nor between the jack Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones. and the car's jacking point. WARNING 4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the 6. There are two jacking points on each side Check that the jack is not damaged, that the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by of the car. There is a recess in the plastic threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. hand. cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the 07 5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlock- ground. Check that the jack is seated cor- wise with the wheel wrench. rectly in the intended jacking point, as illustrated, and that the base is located directly under it.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197 07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

Fitting the wheel 1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub. 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts. 3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot rotate. 4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tightened properly. • Standard wheel nuts - tightening torque: 110 Nm • Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque: 130 Nm IMPORTANT Check the torque with a torque wrench. The ground must be firm, smooth and level. 5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. WARNING Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the Never crawl under the car when it is raised wheel. on the jack. Passengers must leave the car when it is 07 raised on the jack. Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

198 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

Emergency puncture repair, general NOTE 1. Fold up the cargo area floor. information The emergency puncture repair kit is only 2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit. intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread. Overview

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage. 12V sockets for the compressor are located by the centre console in the front, by the rear seat and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

WARNING The emergency puncture repair kit is used to

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h G020400 seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust after the emergency tyre repair kit has been the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor used. Volvo recommends that you visit an Decal, maximum permitted speed and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance Switch must be replaced before its expiration date and is 200 km). The staff there can determine after use. whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if Cable it needs to be replaced. 07 The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- Bottle holder (orange cap) tured in the tread. Taking out the emergency puncture Protective cap repair kit Pressure reducing valve The emergency puncture repair kit with compressor and tools are stored under the floor in Air hose the cargo area.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 199 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

Sealing fluid bottle WARNING WARNING Pressure gauge The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the Do not leave children in the car without case of contact with skin, wash away the supervision when the engine is running. fluid with soap and water. Sealing punctured tyres 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and start the car. locate the cable and the air hose. WARNING NOTE Never stand next to the tyre when the com- Do not break the bottle's seal before use. pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness The seal is broken automatically when the arise then the compressor must be bottle is screwed in. switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended. 4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper. NOTE WARNING When the compressor starts, the pressure G019723 Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure For information on the function of the parts, see with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. drops after approximately 30 seconds. preceding illustration. 1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture 5. Screw the bottle into its holder. 8. Flick the switch to position I. repair kit. 6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw 07 IMPORTANT 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted in the air hose valve connection to the bot- speed and affix it to the steering wheel. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

WARNING specified on the tyre pressure decal. WARNING Release air using the pressure reducing If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole valve if the tyre pressure is too high. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h in the tyre is too big. The journey should not after the emergency tyre repair kit has been be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre used. Volvo recommends that you visit an centre is recommended. WARNING authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. is 200 km). The staff there can determine 10. Switch off the compressor to check the whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum it needs to be replaced. pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is 5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air 3.5 bar. hose and cable. Refit the dust cap. 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the Inflating the tyres cable from the 12 V socket. NOTE The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor. 12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must the valve cap. be replaced after use. Volvo recommends 1. The compressor must be switched off. that this replacement is performed by an Make sure that the switch is in position 0 13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 authorised Volvo workshop. and locate the cable and air hose. km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw WARNING in the air hose valve connection to the bot- Rechecking the repair and pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. 1. Reconnect the equipment. 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure 6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit WARNING gauge. to the cargo area. Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in 07 3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- danger to life. Never leave the engine run- 7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the ning in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficiently sealed. The journey should not be nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the ficient ventilation. continued. Contact a tyre centre. replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. 4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, Advise the workshop that the tyre contains the tyre must be inflated to the pressure sealing fluid.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201 07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

WARNING Changing the sealing fluid canister Replace the bottle before the expiration date Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's WARNING 12 V sockets and start the car. The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch rubber-latex. to position I. Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact. IMPORTANT Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes. Store out of the reach of children.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on NOTE the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using Leave the container at a collection point for the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- storing dangerous waste. sure is too high.) 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable. 7. Refit the dust cap.

202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Wheels and tyres

203 Cleaning...... 206 Touching up paintwork...... 210 Rustproofing...... 211

204 CAR CARE 08 Car care

Cleaning

Washing the car NOTE Chromed wheels Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have IMPORTANT corrosion. condensation on the inside of the lens. This Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on • Do not park the car in direct sunlight. is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a Washing a car with hot paintwork can is designed to withstand this. Condensation sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- is normally vented out of the lamp when it cause permanent paintwork damage. warm water. has been switched on for a time. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator. Automatic car washes • Hose down the underbody thoroughly. Cleaning the wiper blades An automatic car wash is a simple and quick Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, way of washing the car, but it can never replace • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, plenty of lukewarm water. a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto- impair the service life of wiper blades. matic car wash cannot reach everywhere. • If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent. NOTE IMPORTANT • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is shampoo. WARNING also more sensitive when it is new. For this Do not use any strong solvents. reason, handwashing is recommended dur- Always have the engine cleaned by a working the first few months with a new car. shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. Removing bird droppings Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork High-pressure washing as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain When using high-pressure washing, use IMPORTANT chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- very quickly. This discoloration can only be ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for removed by a specialist. surface of the car (the distance applies to all example. exterior parts). 08

206 08 Car care

Cleaning

IMPORTANT IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and Only paint treatment recommended by When using a pressure washer: Make sure rubber. Volvo should be used. Other treatment such that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre When using degreasant on plastic and rub- closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not sealing or similar could damage the paint- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- spray directly onto the locks. work. Paintwork damage caused by such essary. Use a soft washing sponge. treatments is not covered by Volvo war- Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear ranty. Testing the brakes away or damage the glossy surface. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must WARNING not be used. Water-repellent coating* Always test the brakes after washing the Never use products such as car wax, car, including the parking brake, to ensure degreaser or similar on glass surfa- that moisture and corrosion do not attack Polishing and waxing ces as this could ruin their water-repellent the brake linings and reduce braking per- Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull properties. formance. or to give the paintwork extra protection. Take care when cleaning so as not to damage The car does not need to be polished until it is the glass surface. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then at least one year old. However, the car can be when driving long distances in rain or slush. To avoid damaging glass surfaces when waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers. the car in direct sunlight. same thing after starting in very damp or cold There is natural wear of the water-repellent weather. Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you coating. begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt Exterior plastic, rubber and trim and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. NOTE components More stubborn stains can be removed using A special cleaning agent available from Volvo fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. Treatment with a special finishing agent dealers is recommended for the cleaning and available from Volvo dealers is recom- Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim mended in order to maintain the water- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the components (such as glossy trim mouldings). repellent properties. This should be used packaging carefully. Many preparations con- first after three years and then each year. 08 When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tain both polish and wax. tions must be followed carefully.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 08 Car care

Cleaning

Cleaning the interior Treatment of stains on textile upholstery leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- and headliner and shows that it is a natural product. ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly A special fabric cleaning agent, available from To achieve best results Volvo recommends and follow the instructions included with the authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to cleaning and the application of protective car care product. avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of cream once to four times per year (or more if the upholstery. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- agents. able from your Volvo dealer. IMPORTANT Carpets and cargo area Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the IMPORTANT Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of fabric upholstery. the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a • Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Treating stains on leather upholstery may stain the upholstery. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free • Never use strong solvents. Such prod- Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and and approved in accordance with the Oeko- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and lift the mat straight up. Tex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its leather upholstery. original appearance. Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin. Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- Washing instructions for leather tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and upholstery WARNING processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened Before setting off check that the inlaid mat regular cleaning is required in order to maintain sponge and squeeze out a strong foam. in the driver area is firmly affixed and both characteristics and appearance. Volvo 2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular secured in the pins in order to avoid getting offers a comprehensive product for the clean- movements. caught adjacent to and under the pedals. ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the when used in accordance with the instructions, stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the A special textile cleaner is recommended for preserves the leather's protective coating. stain. Do not rub. stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor After a period of use the natural appearance of 08 mats should be cleaned with agents recom- the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- 4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and mended by your Volvo dealer! ing more or less on the surface texture of the allow the leather to dry completely.

208 08 Car care

Cleaning

Protective treatment of leather Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and upholstery blood) Vacuuming is important prior to using leather Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% care agents. ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a 1. Pour a small amount of the protective solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.) cream on the felted cloth and massage in Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate) a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather. 1. Same procedure as group I. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes 2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth. before use. Group 3 (dry dirt, dust) The leather has now been given improved pro- 1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt. tection against stains and improved UV protection. 2. Same procedure as group I. Treating stains on interior plastic, metal IMPORTANT and wood parts Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g. A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo rings). dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains. Washing instructions for the leather Never use strong stain removers. steering wheel Cleaning seatbelts • Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special tened sponge and neutral soap. textile cleaning agent is available from your • Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry leather steering wheel with protective plas- before allowing it to retract. tic. Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care • 08 agents are recommended for best results. If the steering wheel has stains:

209 08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

Paintwork Stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has penetrated to the Paint is an important part of the car's rust- bare metal proofing and should therefore be checked reg- 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged damaged surface. Then remove the tape to paintwork should be rectified immediately. The remove any loose paint. most common types of paintwork damage are 2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine stone chips, scratches, and marks on the brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a edges of wings and doors. brush once the primer is dry. Colour code 3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. 4. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount G020345 of lapping paste.

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C.

Materials • Primer in a can Data plate. • Spray can or touch-up pen1 Code for car colour • Masking tape. It is important that the correct colour is used. Minor stone chips and scratches For product decal location, see page 278. If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, 08 you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged area.

1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.

210 08 Car care

Rustproofing

Inspection and maintenance Your car has already received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resis- tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene- trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the members, cavities and closed sections. Maintain the car's rustproofing. • Keep the car clean. Hose down the underbody. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted surfaces. • Regularly check and touch-up the rustproofing treatment as necessary. The car's rustproofing does not normally require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three- year intervals. If the car needs further treatment, Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.

211 Volvo service...... 214 Self-maintenance...... 215 Bonnet and engine compartment...... 216 Oils and fluids...... 218 Wiper blades...... 224 Battery...... 226 Replacing bulbs...... 228 Fuses...... 234

212 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 09 Maintenance and service

09 Volvo service

Volvo service programme Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly test driven. It was checked again in accordance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations before it was handed over to you. To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo also recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.

IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Special service measures Certain service measures which affect the car's electrical system can only be performed using electronic equipment specially developed for your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before beginning or performing service work that affects the electrical system.

214 09 Maintenance and service

Self-maintenance 09

Before starting work on the car Raising the car If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are Battery fixed under the lifting points. See preceding Check that the battery cables are correctly illustration. connected and tightened. Never disconnect the battery when the engine Check regularly is running (e.g. if replacing the battery). Check the following at regular intervals, for Never use a quick charger to charge the bat- example, when refuelling: tery. The battery cables must be disconnected • Coolant – The level must be between the when charging the battery. MIN and MAX marks on the expansion The battery contains acid that is both corrosive tank. and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the • Engine oil – The level must be between the battery in an environmentally correct manner. MIN and MAX marks. Let your Volvo dealer assist you. • Power steering fluid – The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. WARNING NOTE • Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well High output from the ignition system. The filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- voltage in the ignition system is highly dan- Volvo recommends only using the jack that tures around freezing. belongs to the car model in question. If a gerous. The ignition must therefore always Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be be switched off for work in the engine com- jack is selected other than the one recom- • between the MIN and MAX marks. partment. mended by Volvo, follow the instructions for use supplied with the equipment Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils WARNING when the ignition is on or the engine is hot. If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi- Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start tion the jack against the front edge on the sub- automatically some time after the engine frame. has been switched off. Do not damage the splashguard under the Always have the engine cleaned by a work- engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always hot. use axle stands or similar.

215 09 Maintenance and service

09 Bonnet and engine compartment

Opening the bonnet G020793

The illustration shows a left-hand drive car. 1. Pull the handle on the far left under the WARNING Engine oil dipstick1 instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars the handle is on the far right.) You will hear Check that the bonnet locks properly when Radiator closed. when the catch releases. Radiator fan 2. Insert your hand under the centre of the Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.) front edge of the bonnet and press the Engine compartment safety catch to the right. Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.) Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive) 3. Open the bonnet. Coolant expansion tank Filler opening for engine oil1 Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con- Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand cealed behind the headlamp) drive)

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

216 09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

Battery Relay and fuse box, engine compartment

Air filter1

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

217 09 Maintenance and service

09 Oils and fluids

Engine compartment decal for oil Checking the engine oil and oil filter grade

G020338 Diesel engine. Dipstick, petrol engines. Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines. Filler pipe, engine oil. IMPORTANT Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. the engine compartment decal. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than that specified on the decal, see page 285.

218 09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

IMPORTANT Change the engine oil in accordance with the Checking the oil intervals specified in the Service and Warranty In order to fulfil the requirements for the Booklet. engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic Using oil of a higher than specified grade is engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- has been made very carefully with regard to ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a service life, starting characteristics, fuel higher grade than that specified on the decal, consumption and environmental impact. see page 218. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- For capacities, see page 285 and onwards. vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed Checking the oil level in a new car is especially grade of oil (see the engine compartment important before the first scheduled oil change. decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, star- Volvo recommends checking the oil level every ting characteristics, fuel consumption and 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements G020336 environmental impact. are made on a cold engine before starting. The Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- The oil level must be within the area marked on the ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed diately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick. grade and viscosity is not used. dipstick will indicate that the level is too low Engine with oil dipstick1 because the oil has not had time to flow down 1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching into the oil sump. Volvo uses different systems for warning of off the engine it is important to wait low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer- 5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and to the sump. then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the 2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick. driver is informed via the warning symbol in the 3. Re-insert the dipstick. centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Certain models have both variants. 4. Pull it out and check the level. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

1 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.

219 09 Maintenance and service

09 Oils and fluids

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres For engines with electronic oil level should be added. If the level is significantly sensor below, then an additional amount is required. 6. If required, check the level again, do it after driving a short distance. Then repeat steps 1 - 4.

WARNING Never fill above the MAX mark. The level should never be above MAX or below MIN as this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING Message and graph in the display. Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold Message due to the risk of fire. Filler pipe.2 Engine oil level You do not need to take action with respect to the engine oil level before a message is shown The oil level is checked using the electronic oil in the display, see the illustration below. level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 66.

WARNING If the message Oil service required is shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may be too high.

2 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).

220 09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

IMPORTANT Measuring the oil level Washer fluid, topping up If the oil level needs to be checked then it In the event of the message Engine oil should be carried out in accordance with the , only fill with 0.5 litres. level Fill with 0.5 l oil sequence below. 1. Activate key position II, see page 154. NOTE 2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand The oil level is only detected by the system stalk switch to position Engine oil level during driving. The system cannot directly Wait.... detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must be driven > You will then see information displayed about 30 km before the oil level display is about the engine oil level. correct.

WARNING G020335 Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4) 3 appears as shown in the illustration below. Location of washer fluid reservoir . The level must never be above MAX or The windscreen and headlamp washers share below MIN, as this could lead to engine a common reservoir. damage. For capacities, see the table Fluids on page 287. WARNING Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel. Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines. due to the risk of fire. Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom- and hoses. mended filling level is 4.

3 Depending on engine alternative.

221 09 Maintenance and service

09 Oils and fluids

NOTE IMPORTANT not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) Mix the washer antifreeze and water before • A high content of chlorine, chlorides to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when filling the reservoir. and other salts may cause corrosion in the level falls to the MIN mark. the cooling system. TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion WARNING washer fluid. agent as recommended by Volvo. Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% requires topping up when the engine is at Checking and topping up the coolant water and 50% coolant. operating temperature, unscrew the expan- • Mix the coolant with approved quality sion tank cap slowly to gently release the tap water. In the event of any doubt overpressure. about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- NOTE ommendations. • When changing coolant/replacing cool- The engine must only be run with a well- ing system components, flush the cool- filled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage ing system clean with approved quality (cracks) to the cylinder head. tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant. • The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High temperatures may occur, causing a risk of dam-

G020334 age (cracks) to the cylinder head.

When topping up the coolant, follow the For capacities and for standards regarding instructions on the packaging. It is important water quality, see page 287. that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- Check the coolant regularly ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk The level must lie between the MIN and MAX of freezing increases with both too little and too marks on the expansion tank. If the system is much coolant concentrate.

222 09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

Checking and topping up the brake and WARNING clutch fluid If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Checking and topping up the power steering fluid

NOTE Check the level frequently.

G020333 The fluid does not require changing. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- page 285. voir4. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly. If a fault should arise in the power steering sys- Change the brake fluid every other year or at tem or if the car is without power and must be every other regular service. towed, it can still be steered. However, the steering will be much heavier than normal and For capacities and recommended fluid grade, it will require more effort to turn the steering see the table Fluids on page 287. wheel. The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- cal climates with high humidity.

4 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.

223 09 Maintenance and service

09 Wiper blades

Wiper blades Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen 1. Turn up the wiper arm. 2. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm. 3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. > Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed and fold down the wiper arm.

Changing the rear window wiper blade G020330

NOTE The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see G014732 page 206. 1. Fold out the wiper arm. IMPORTANT 2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling it Check the wiper blades regularly. towards the rear window. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades. 3. Press the new wiper blade into position. G020329

224 09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

> Check that it is firmly installed and fold back the wiper arm.

225 09 Maintenance and service

09 Battery

Battery care NOTE Symbols on the battery The service life and function of the battery is The life of the battery is shortened if it Use protective goggles. influenced by factors such as the number of becomes discharged repeatedly. starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions and climatic conditions. The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases NOTE gradually with time and therefore needs to An expended battery must be recycled in an be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short Further information in the environmentally correct manner as it con- owner's manual. tains lead. distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. To maintain the battery in good condition, at WARNING least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, a battery charger with automatic trickle which is highly explosive. One spark, which Store the battery out of charging. can be generated if you connect the jump the reach of children. leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the A battery that is kept fully charged has a battery explode. The battery contains sul- maximum service life. phuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek The battery contains cor- medical attention immediately. rosive acid.

226 09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

Avoid sparks and naked 4. Disconnect the negative battery lead. flames. 5. Disconnect the positive battery lead. 6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using a screwdriver. 7. Release the clamp securing the battery. Risk of explosion. 8. Remove the battery. Fitting the battery 1. Fit the battery into position. 2. Fit the clamp securing the battery. 3. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box. Must be taken for recy- 4. Connect the positive lead. cling. 5. Connect the negative lead. 6. Refit the cover over the battery.

Changing the battery Removing the battery 1. Switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key. 2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any electrical terminals. The car's electrical system has to store information in the control modules. 3. Remove the cover.

227 09 Maintenance and service

09 Replacing bulbs

General Changing front bulbs 3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then All bulb specifications are given on page 292. forward. The following list contains bulbs and point- 4. Unplug the connector by pressing down source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable the clip with a thumb while moving out the for changing except at a workshop: connector with the other hand. • General interior lighting in the roof • Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glovebox lighting • Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting • Brake light • Active Bending Lights (ABL)

• Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler G019599

WARNING All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are changed by first removing the lamp housing On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head- from the engine compartment. lamp replacement must be performed at a G019600 workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop Removing the lamp housing is recommended. The lamp must be han- 1. Remove the remote control key and turn 5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a dled with extreme caution because it is soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. equipped with a high voltage unit. the light switch to position 0. 2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin. Fitting the lamp housing IMPORTANT 1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp IMPORTANT housing and locking pin. Check that the pin Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with is correctly inserted. your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the nector. 2. Check the lighting. reflector and then causing damage. The lamp housing must be plugged in and secured in place before the lighting is switched

228 09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09 on or the remote control key inserted into the Main beam, Halogen ignition switch.

Dipped beam G019133 G019136

Fitting a new bulb The illustration shows a halogen bulb. 1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi- 1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see

G019131 tion. page 228. 2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly Removing the cover and bulb to the right in order to snap it into position. 2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise. 1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see 3. Press the connector back on. page 228. 3. Left-hand headlamp: 4. Refit the plastic cover. 2. Bend aside the catches and remove the Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise. cover. 5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 228. Right-hand headlamp: 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. Turn the bulb holder clockwise. 4. Release the spring clip securing the bulb. 4. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the Press it in/down. bulb. 5. Pull out the bulb.

229 09 Maintenance and service

09 Replacing bulbs

5. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted 4. Press the bulb holder back on. A "click" is 2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and in one position. heard when the bulb holder is fitted cor- remove it. rectly. 6. Refit the cover, located above the lamp 3. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder, housing, by turning it clockwise. 5. Refit the cover, located above the lamp press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise. housing, by turning it clockwise. 7. Refit the lamp housing, see page 228. 4. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into 6. Refit the lamp housing, see page 228. the lamp housing. Position/parking lamps 5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 228. NOTE A lamp equipped with "Active Bending Side marker lamps Lights* has a position lamp (LED) which cannot be replaced.

Direction indicators G019145

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 228. G018050 2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise. 1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 228. 3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the 2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and

bulb. G019150 withdraw it. Replace the bulb. 3. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one 1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 228. position.

230 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

4. Refit the lamp housing, see page 228. 6. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. (The 3. The bulbs are located in separate bulb profile of the bulb holder corresponds to holders. the profile of the foot of the bulb.) Front fog lamps 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder. 7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the 5. Press the catches together and pull out the bulb holder must always be upward. bulb holder. 6. Replace the bulb. Removing the bulb holder 7. Plug in the connector. 8. Press the bulb holder into place and refit the cover (A or B).

NOTE If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo

G019605 workshop.

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Undo the cover by inserting a screwdriver G019166 as illustrated (vertically) and continue to press vertically in order to undo the clip All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced inside the cover. from inside the cargo area. 3. Grip the edge of the cover and pull straight 1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote out. control key to position 0. 4. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull 2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/right- it out. hand panel to access the bulbs. 5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

231 09 Maintenance and service

09 Replacing bulbs

Location of the bulbs in the rear lamp Brake light (LED) Number plate lighting Position lamp Position/parking lamps Direction indicators Reversing lamp Rear fog lamp (one side)

NOTE The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and in the right on a right-hand drive. G014849

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0. 2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 3. Detach the lens carefully. G018058 4. Replace the bulb. Bulb holder. 5. Refit and screw in the lens. IMPORTANT The cable for the brake light's LED lamps is moulded into the upper bulb holder. It shall not be removed.

232 09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

Cargo area Vanity mirror lighting* Fitting the mirror glass 1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of mirror glass back into position. 2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position. G014852 G020253

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that Removing the mirror glass the lamp housing comes loose. 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower 2. Remove the blown bulb. edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge. 3. Fit a new bulb. 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right-hand sides (by the black rubber sections), and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover. 4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with a new one.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 233 09 Maintenance and service

09 Fuses

General WARNING All electrical functions and components are Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an fused to protect the car's electrical system amperage higher than that specified when from damage by short circuiting and overload- replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- ing. cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. The fuses are in two different locations in the car: • Relay/Fuse box in the engine compartment. • Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment.

Changing If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew. 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. Each fuse box has space for several spare fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the component. In which case, Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for this to be checked.

234 09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment G007446

The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. • Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type. • Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type and should be replaced by a workshop.1 • Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop.1 On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

235 09 Maintenance and service

09 Fuses G020250

1. Cooling fan 50 A 8. ABS valves 20 A 17. Windscreen wipers 30 A

2. Power steering 80 A 9. Engine functions 30 A 18. Supply to passenger compartment fuse box 40 A 3. Supply to passenger com- 10. Ventilation fan 40 A partment fuse box 60 A 19. Reserve – 11. Headlamp washers 20 A 4. Supply to passenger com- 20. Horn 15 A partment fuse box 60 A 12. Heated rear window 30 A 21. Fuel-driven additional heater, 5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A 13. Actuator solenoid, starter passenger compartment motor 30 A heater* 20 A 6. Glow plugs (DRIVe) 60 A 14. Trailer wiring* 40 A 22. Reserve – Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A 15. Reserve – 7. ABS pump 40 A 16. Infotainment system 30 A

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

23. Engine control module (5-cyl. 32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo 35. Relay coil, relay, climate con- petrol), Transmission control control valve (5-cyl. diesel), trol system, PTC element, oil module (5-cyl.) 10 A Oil level sensor (5-cyl. diesel) trap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol), Control valve, fuel flow Transmission control module Turbo control valve (5-cyl. (DRIVe), Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl.) 15 A petrol), Solenoids, variable (DRIVe), Control motor turbo valve timing (5-cyl. petrol), 24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. die- (DRIVe) 10 A sel), PTC element, oil trap (5- Injectors (2.0 l petrol), EVAP cyl. diesel) 20 A 33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), valve (2.0 l petrol), Valve, air/ Relay coil, relay, vacuum fuel mixture (2.0 l petrol), Con- 25. Central electronic module pump (5-cyl. petrol), Engine trol valve, fuel pressure (5-cyl. (CEM) (Start/Stop) 10 A control module (5-cyl. diesel), diesel), Engine control mod- Heated fuel filter (DRIVe) 20 A ule (5-cyl. diesel), Engine EGR 26. Ignition switch 15 A (DRIVe) 15 A 34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pres- 27. A/C compressor 10 A sure switch, climate control 36. Engine control module (petrol, DRIVe), Accelerator pedal 28. Reserve – system (5-cyl.), Control module, glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel), position sensor (5-cyl. diesel), 29. Fog lamp, front EGR emission control (5-cyl. Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A diesel), Fuel pump (DRIVe), Daytime running lights (DRL)* 15 A Lambda-sond (DRIVe), 30. Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10 A Engine control module (Start/ Stop), Relay coils, relays 31. Voltage regulator, alternator Start/Stop 10 A (4-cyl. petrol) 10 A

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 09 Maintenance and service

09 Fuses

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment G020601

The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses completely. The fuse box can be fully are located under the glovebox. The box also unhooked. provides space for several spare fuses. Tools 4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order. for fuse replacement are located in the relay/ fuse box in the engine compartment, see 5. Remove the pins from the centre of the page 235. clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the pins into the clips. This expands the clips Replacing fuses and secures the trim. 1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box by pressing in the pin in the centre of the clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw- ing the clips. 2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove them. 3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it towards the seat until it stops. Lower it

238 09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

43. Phone*, Audio system, 48. Washer, rear window 15 A 54. Parking assistance*, RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A Xenon* 10 A 49. SRS system 10 A 44. SRS system, Engine con- 55. Control module Keyless* 20 A trol module (5-cyl, DRIVe) 10 A 50. Reserve – 56. Remote control receiver, 45. Electrical socket, passen- 51. PTC element, air pre- Siren* 10 A ger compartment 15 A heater*, Relay coil, relay, heated fuel filter (5-cyl. 57. Data link connector 46. Passenger compartment, diesel), AWD 10 A (DLC), brake light switch 15 A glovebox and courtesy lighting 5 A 52. Transmission control 58. Main beam, right, Relay module, ABS system 5 A coil, relay, auxiliary 47. Interior lighting, Remote lamps* 7.5 A controlled garage door 53. Power steering 10 A opener* 5 A 59. Main beam, left 7.5 A

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 239 09 Maintenance and service

09 Fuses

60. Seat heating (driver's 73. Sunroof*, Overhead con- 85. Power seat, driver 25 A side) 15 A sole for interior lighting, Seatbelt reminder, rear, 86. Interior lighting, cargo 61. Seat heating (passenger Dimming, interior rear- area lighting, power side) 15 A view mirror* 5 A seats, fuel level display (2.0F) 5 A 62. Sunroof* 20 A 74. Fuel pump 15 A

63. Supply to rear right door 20 A 75. Reserve –

64. Satellite radio* 5 A 76. Reserve –

65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A 77. Electrical socket cargo 66. Audio, Infotainment, Cli- area, Control module, mate control system 10 A accessories* 15 A

67. Reserve – 78. Reserve –

68. Cruise control 5 A 79. Reversing lamp, Dim- ming, interior rearview 69. Climate control system, mirror (signal) 5 A Rain sensor, Buttons for BLIS*, parking assis- 80. Reserve - tance*, DRIVe 5 A 81. Supply to rear left door 20 A

70. Reserve – 82. Supply to front right door 25 A

71. Reserve – 83. Supply to front left door 25 A

72. Reserve – 84. Power seat, passenger 25 A

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Maintenance and service

241 General...... 244 Audio functions...... 246 Radio functions...... 250 CD functions ...... 255 Menu structure – audio system...... 258 Phone functions*...... 259 Menu structure – phone*...... 266 Bluetooth handsfree*...... 269

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM 10 Infotainment system

General

Infotainment system system can be easily operated using the con- • EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the 10 page 73. The display (2) shows messages and menu system. information on the current function. Shortcuts Menu options are numbered and can also be Audio system selected directly with the keypad (3). So first press MENU and then the figure/figures for the On/Off desired menu option. POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio system. If the audio system is active when the remote control key is turned to position 0 then Equipment it continues to be active until the remote control The audio system can be equipped with differ- key is removed from the ignition switch. The ent options and different versions. There are audio system is started automatically the next three audio system versions:

G020245 time the remote control key is turned to posi- Performance, tion I. • POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/ • High Performance* or off Menus • Premuim Sound* Display Some infotainment system functions are con- However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD player are included in all audio systems. Keypad trolled via a menu system. The current menu level is shown at the top right of the display. MENU - Goes to the menu system Menu options are shown in the middle of the Navigation buttons display. • MENU (4) leads to the menu system. EXIT - Exits the menu system • Up/down with the navigation button (5) ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates moves between menu options. Infotainment is a system that integrates the • ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates audio system and phone*. The infotainment one of the menu options.

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

General

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II1 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the 10 two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and rear speakers. This provides a more real- istic sound quality than that provided by standard two-channel stereo. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

1 Premium Sound.

245 10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

Audio controls ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi- The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec- cle speed, see page 249. tion of an external audio source, e.g. an 10 iPod1 or MP3 player. Audio source selection Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches If you choose to connect an iPod, MP3 player between FM1, FM2 and AM. or a USB memory stick to the USB connection then you can control the media via the car's Repeatedly pressing MODE switches between audio controls. CD, USB and AUX. Use the MODE button to select the external audio source you wish to use. External audio sources 1. If USB is selected then Connect device is General shown in the display. 2. Connect your iPod, MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection in the centre console's storage compartment VOLUME - Knob (see preceding illustration). AM/FM – Audio source selection > The text Loading appears on the display when the system loads the file MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX structure on the storage media. This and USB (e.g. iPod)1 takes a while. TUNING - Knob When the loading is finished the track information is shown on the display and it is possible SOUND - Button to select the track required. Navigation button - Menus Track selection can take place in the following three ways: Volume AUX input Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad to regulate the volume, see page 73. Audio vol- USB input*

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- NOTE AUX wise. Sometimes the AUX external audio source can The system supports removable media be heard at a different volume to the internal 10 • Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the navigation control to scroll to the desired FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio track. mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The volume of the external audio source is too high • With the steering wheel keypad. memory must have a capacity of at least 256 then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre- Mb. vent this by adjusting the input volume of the In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system AUX input. operates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files. For MP3 player NOTE more information, see page 255. Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For The sound quality may be impaired if the NOTE use in the system, an MP3 player must be set player is charged while the audio system is in USB Removable device/Mass Storage in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player. The system supports the playback of music Device mode. files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- iPod Audio settings mats that are not supported by the system. An iPod is charged and supplied with power The system also supports most iPod mod- by the USB connection via the player's con- Adjusting audio settings els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle nection cable. However, if the player's battery Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among is not supported. is completely discharged then it must be the following options. Adjust by turning charged before the player is connected. TUNING. USB memory • BASS - Bass level. To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor- NOTE ing any files other than music files in the mem- • TREBLE - Treble level. When an iPod is used as audio source, the ory. It takes considerably longer for the system • FADER – Balance between the front and car's infotainment system has a menu to load storage media that contains items other rear speakers. structure that is similar to the iPod player's than playable music files. own menu structure. • BALANCE – Balance between the left and right-hand speakers. • SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

ment is possible, see under the heading Surround2 Equalizer front/rear4 Activating/deactivating the subwoofer Surround settings govern the spatial The equalizer can be used to adjust different 10 below. perception of the sound. Settings frequency bands separately. • CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker. and activating/deactivating are sep-

G021216 Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must arate for each audio source. Adjusting equalizer be activated before adjustment is possible, 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. The Dolby icon in the display indicates that see under the heading Activating/deacti- 2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press vating surround sound below. Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three different settings for surround sound: ENTER. • SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro 3. Scroll to Equalizer front… or Equalizer Logic II must be activated before adjust- • Dolby Pro Logic II rear… and press ENTER. ment is possible, see under the heading • 3 channel Audio settings below. 4. The graphic on the display indicates the • Off - 2 channel stereo. audio level of the frequency in question. Activating/deactivating the subwoofer Activating/deactivating surround sound • Press MENU and then ENTER. 5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/ 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. down with the navigation button. Addi- • Scroll to Audio settings… and press tional frequencies can be selected using ENTER. 2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press ENTER. the left/right navigation button. • Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER. 3. Scroll to Surround FM…, Surround 6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without AM…, Surround CD…or Surround saving the settings. AUX… and press ENTER. 4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel or Off and press ENTER.

2 Premium Sound. 3 Not available in AM and FM mode. 4 Certain audio systems.

248 10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

Automatic volume control5 are only intended for the user to be able to The auto volume control function allows the adapt the sound reproduction according to 10 audio volume to increase as the speed of the personal taste. car increases. There are three levels to choose from: Low, Medium and High. Adjusting automatic volume control 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. 2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press ENTER. 3. Scroll to Auto. volume control… and press ENTER. 4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press ENTER. Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system. There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed. The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*

5 Not Performance

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

Radio controls Tuning Storing stations Ten station presets can be stored per wave- 10 Automatic tuning length. FM has two memories for presets: 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1). FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected 2. Give a brief press on or . using the preset buttons (2) or the steering wheel keypad. The radio then automatically searches for the next strong station. Storing stations manually 1. Tune into a station. Manual tuning 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1). 2. Hold a station preset button depressed until the message Station stored appears 2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING on the display. (3). Tune into a station with a long press on or Automatic storage of stations G019806 AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta- . Or by using the steering wheel keypad: tions and stores them automatically in a sepa- FM/AM – Wavelength selection Hold in or on the navigation button rate memory. The function is especially useful Station presets depressed until the desired frequency in areas where the radio stations and their fre- appears on the display. quencies are unfamiliar. TUNING – Knob for station searches As long as the frequency graphic appears on Starting automatic storage of stations SCAN – Scanning the display, searching can be resumed by 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1). Navigation button - Tuning and menus briefly pressing or . 2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until Autostoring appears on the display. EXIT - Cancel current function Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- AUTO – Automatic storage of stations play, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons (2). Cancelling automatic storage of stations Press EXIT (6).

250 10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

Selecting an auto-stored preset Scanning • Automatically switches to a stronger trans- Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro- SCAN (4) automatically searches through a mitter if reception in the area is poor. 10 vides access to the autostored presets. wavelength for strong stations. When a station • Searches for programme form, such as 1. Briefly press AUTO (7). is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds traffic information or news. before scanning is resumed. > Auto appears on the display. • Receives text information on current radio programme. 2. Press a preset button (2). Activating/deactivating Scan 1. Select wavelength using AM/FM. Some radio stations do not use RDS or only > The radio remains in Auto mode until it some if its functionality. is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7), 2. Press SCAN to activate. EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto > SCAN appears on the display. Close Programme functions mode. using SCAN or EXIT. In FM mode, the radio can search for stations Storing autostored presets in another with certain programme types. If a required memory Storing a station A selected station can be stored as a preset programme type is located the radio can An autostored preset can be transferred to the while SCAN is active. switch stations interrupting the audio source FM or AM memory. currently in use. For example, if the CD player Press a station preset button and hold it 1. Briefly press AUTO (7). is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans- depressed until the message Station > Auto appears on the display. mission is played at a preset audio volume, see stored appears on the display. page 254. The radio returns to the previous 2. Press the preset button for the station you > Scanning is interrupted and the stored audio source and audio volume when the set want to move. station can be selected as a preset. programme type is no longer broadcast. 3. Press the button under which the station The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), will be stored and hold it depressed until RDS functions traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro- the message Station stored appears on Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in the display. into a network. An FM transmitter in such a order of priority, where alarm has the highest > The radio exits Auto mode and the network sends information that gives an priority and programme types has the lowest. stored station can be selected as a pre- RDS radio the following functions: If you want to return to the interrupted audio set. source before the message or programme type has been completed, press EXIT.

251 10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

For further programme interruption settings, 3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and Activating/deactivating News see EON and REG see page 253. The pro- press ENTER. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. 10 gramme functions are modified via the menu 4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER. 2. Scroll to and press ENTER. system, see page 244. News 5. Scroll to TP station… and press ENTER. News from current station/all stations Alarm > Either TP from current station or TP The radio can interrupt with news from only the This function is used to warn of serious acci- from all stations is shown on the dis- set (current) station or from all stations. dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be play. temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The 1. Select an FM station. message ALARM! appears on the display 6. Press ENTER. 2. Press MENU and then ENTER. when an alarm message is transmitted. Activating/deactivating TP search 3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and Traffic information – TP TP search is useful during long journeys while press ENTER. This function allows traffic informa- an audio source other than the radio is being 4. Scroll to News station… and press tion broadcast within a set station's played. The function automatically searches ENTER. RDS network to break through. for traffic information within different

G021220 TP > Either Press ENTER to receive news shows that the function has been RDS networks. from this station only. or News from activated. If the set station can send traffic 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. all stations is shown on the display. information then appears on the display. 2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and 5. Press ENTER. Activating/deactivating TP press ENTER. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. Programme types – PTY 3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER. The PTY function can be used to 2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER. 4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER. select different programme types, TP from current station/all stations such as and

G021222 Pop music Serious The radio can interrupt with traffic information News classic. The PTY symbol indicates from only the set (current) station or from all This function allows news broad- that the function is active. This function allows stations. casts within a set station's programme types broadcast within a set sta- RDS network to break through. The 1. Select an FM station. G021221 tion's RDS network to break through. message News shows that the func- 2. Press MENU and then ENTER. tion is active. Activating/deactivating PTY 1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.

252 10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

2. Press MENU and then ENTER. Display of programme type Automatic frequency update – AF The programme type of the current station can The AF function selects one of the strongest 3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER. 10 be shown on the display. transmitters for a set station. The radio may 4. Scroll to Select PTY… and press sometimes need to search through the entire ENTER. NOTE FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If > A list of programme types appears: this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Not all radio stations support this function. Current affairs, Information etc. The Press EXIT to cancel. appears in the display. PTY function is activated by selecting programme types and deactivated by Activating/deactivating display Activating/deactivating AF clearing all PTYs. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. 5. Select the desired programme types or 2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER. 2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and Clear all PTY… press ENTER. 3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER. Search PTY 3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER. This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type. Radio text Some RDS stations transmit information on Regional radio programmes – REG 1. Activate PTY. programme content, artists, etc. This informa- This function causes the radio to con- 2. Press MENU and then ENTER. tion can be shown on the display. tinue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low.

G021223 3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER. Activating/deactivating radio text Regional indicates that the function 4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. is active. The regional function is normally deactivated. If the radio finds any of the selected pro- 2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER. gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis- Activating/deactivating REG play. Press the navigation button to con- 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. tinue searching for another broadcast of the 2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and selected programme types. press ENTER. 3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.

253 10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

Enhanced Other Networks – EON Resetting RDS functions The EON function is especially useful in urban Resets all radio settings to the original factory 10 areas with many regional radio stations. It settings. allows the distance between the car and the 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the cur- 2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and rent audio source. press ENTER. • Local – interrupts only if the radio station 3. Scroll to Reset all… and press ENTER. transmitter is close. • Distant – interrupts if the station transmit- Volume control, programme types ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static. The interrupting programme types are heard at • Off – no interruption for programmes from the volume selected for each programme type. other transmitters. If the volume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved Activating/deactivating EON until the next programme interruption. 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. 2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and press ENTER. 3. Scroll to EON… and press ENTER. 4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press ENTER.

254 10 Infotainment system

CD functions

CD function controls automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and Pause change to CD mode by pressing MODE. If the volume is turned down completely, the CD player is stopped. The player is restarted 10 Start playback (CD changer*) when volume is increased. If a CD position with a music CD is already selected when the audio system is activated Audio files* then playback starts automatically. Otherwise The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3 change to CD changer mode using MODE and and WMA format audio files. select a disc with the number buttons 1–6 or Up/Down on the navigation button. NOTE Insert a CD Certain types of copy-protected audio files 1. Select an empty position with buttons 1– cannot be read by the player. 6 or Up/Down on the navigation button. > An empty position is marked on the dis- When a CD containing audio files is inserted G019807 play. The text Insert disc shows that a into the player the disc's folder structure is loa- Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind, new disc can be inserted. The ded in. It may take a while before playback track selection and menus CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs. starts due to the quality of the disc. CD changer position selection* 2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer. Navigation and playback CD eject If a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD insertion/eject A CD will stay in the ejected position for CD player then the disc's folder structure is CD insertion/eject slot approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re- shown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc- inserted in the player and playback continues. ture is navigated in the same way as the audio MODE - Selection of audio source (CD, system's menu structure. Audio files have the AUX, USB*) Eject individual discs by pressing the eject button (3). symbol and folders have the symbol . TUNING - Knob for track selection Start audio file playback with ENTER. Eject all discs with a long press on the eject When the playback of a file is finished the play- Starting playback (CD player) button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by back of the other files in the same folder con- If a music CD is in the player when the audio disc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in the tinues. Folder change takes place automati- system is in CD mode then playback is started display.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 10 Infotainment system

CD functions

cally when all files in the current folder have NOTE Activating/deactivating, random (CD been played back. changer) 10 It is only possible to scroll between random If a normal music CD is being played: Press left/right on the navigation button if the CD tracks 1 on the current disc. display is not wide enough to show the whole 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. audio file name. Different messages appear on the display 2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER. depending on which random function has been Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio 3. selected: Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press files ENTER. Short presses right/left on the navigation but- • RANDOM means that the tracks from only ton are used to scroll between one music CD are played The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer. CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used • RND ALL means that all tracks on all to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or music CDs in the CD changer are played. If a CD with audio files is being played: the steering wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose. • RND FLD means that the audio files in a 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. folder on the current CD are played. 2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER. Scan CD Activating/deactivating, random (CD 3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press This function plays the first 10 seconds of each player) ENTER. CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate. If a normal music CD is being played: Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play- The function is deactivated when another CD 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. back of the current CD track/audio file. is selected. 2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER. Random Disc text This function plays the tracks in random order. If a disc with audio files is being played: If title information is stored on a music CD then The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- 1. Press MENU and then ENTER. it can be shown on the display2. led through in the normal way. 2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER. Activating/deactivating 1. Start CD playback. 3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER. 2. Press MENU and then ENTER. 3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.

1 Applies to the CD changer. 2 Applies to CD changer.

256 10 Infotainment system

CD functions

CDs Using low quality CD discs could result in poor or non-existent sound. 10

IMPORTANT Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

257 10 Infotainment system

Menu structure – audio system

Overview 4. TP 3. TP FM MENU 10 5. Disc text 4.* Audio settings… 1. News 6.* Audio settings… USB MENU* 2. TP CD MENU 1. Playlist 3. PTY… For CD changer* with CD disc 2. Random… selected. 4. Radio text 3. News 1. Random… 5. Advanced radio settings… 4. TP 2. News 6.* Audio settings… 5. Track information 3. TP AM MENU 6. Audio settings… 1.* Audio settings… 4. Disc text CD MENU 5.* Audio settings… For CD player with CD disc. CD MENU 1. Random For CD changer* with MP3 disc selected. 2. News 1. Playlist 3. TP 2. Random… 4. Disc text 3. News 5.* Audio settings… 4. TP CD MENU 5. Disc text For CD player with MP3 disc. 6.* Audio settings… 1. Playlist AUX MENU 2. Random… 1. AUX input volume… 3. News 2. News

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

Phone system components.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

Phone system components Emergency calls SIM card Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made 10 Antenna1 without a SIM card as long as there is coverage Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys- by a network operator. tem functions can be accessed via the keypad. see page 261. Making an emergency call 1. Activate the phone. Microphone. The microphone for handsfree is fitted in the roof by the sun visor. 2. Ring the emergency number that applies to your region (within EU: 112). Centre console control panel. All phone functions (except call volume) can be regu- 3. Press ENTER. lated via the control panel. Privacy handset* IDIS With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver

SIM card reader G020244 Information System), incoming phone calls and SMS messages can be delayed so that con- General centration can be focused on driving when IDIS The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are • Always put traffic safety first. determines that the traffic situation requires a high level of attention. available from various network operators. In • If the driver needs to use the privacy hand- the event of problems with the card, contact set*, park the car in a safe place first. Incoming calls and SMS messages can be your network operator. • Switch off the phone system when refuel- delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If ling the car. the current traffic situation still requires a high NOTE level of attention from the driver then the Switch off the system near blasting work. • incoming call is diverted to the voice mail. The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM • Volvo recommends that an authorised Missed calls are shown in the display. cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards Volvo workshop carries out phone system work. Contact your network operator if a servicing. IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5, replacement SIM card is required. see page 266.

1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

Extra SIM card Phone controls Steering wheel keypad Many network operators offer two SIM cards for the same phone number. The extra SIM 10 card can be used in the car.

Inserting the SIM card 1. Switch off the phone and open the glovebox. 2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM card reader, see illustration on page 260. 3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of the SIM card should align with the bevel of the SIM card holder. G019809 G020243 4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder. Centre console control panel. When the phone is active, the steering wheel VOLUME - Control the background vol- Menus keypad is locked to phone functions. To con- ume from the radio, for example, during a trol the audio system, the phone must be in Page 266 describes how to control phone call standby mode (standby). functions with the menu system. Number and letter buttons ENTER – Works the same as on the control panel Traffic safety MENU - Opens the main menu EXIT – Works the same as on the control For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- panel system cannot be accessed at speeds in acters Call volume – Increase/decrease excess of 8 km/h. Navigation button – Scroll in menus and character rows Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the button reveals latest dialled numbers PHONE - On/off and standby mode

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

On/Off Activating from standby mode Call waiting A handset appears in the display when the Press PHONE. A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates 10 phone system is active or in standby mode that there is another incoming call. Answer? is (standby). If the remote control key is turned to Making and receiving calls shown in the display. The call can be refused position 0 when the phone is in one of these or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming modes, the phone automatically resumes this To call call is taken, the previous call is put on hold. mode the next time the remote control key is 1. Activate the phone system (if necessary). turned to position I or II. Putting a call on hold/resuming a call 2. Dial the number or use the phone book, 1. Press MENU or ENTER. see page 264. Activating the phone system 2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and press Phone system functions can only be used 3. Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release ENTER. when the phone is in active mode. the handset by pressing it down. 1. Press PHONE. Dialling a third party NOTE 1. Put the call on hold. 2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press ENTER. If the privacy handset* is off the hook when 2. Dial the number of the third party. a phone call is started, the sound will come Deactivating the phone system from the handsfree system. For information Switching between calls No calls can be received when the phone is on switching between privacy handset and 1. Press MENU or ENTER. handsfree during a call, see page 264 deactivated. 2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER. Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is Receiving a call Starting a conference call deactivated. For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see A conference call consists of three parties that Standby mode (standby) page 266. can talk to one another. Once a conference call has been initiated, no more parties can be con- In standby mode, the audio system can be in Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release nected. All calls are ended when a conference use while calls are received. However, it is not the handset by pressing it down. possible to make calls when in standby mode. call is ended. Ending a call Putting the phone in standby mode 1. Start two phone calls. Press EXIT or hang up the handset. The phone must first be in active mode before 2. Press MENU or ENTER. it can be put in standby mode. Refusing a call 3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER. Press PHONE. Press EXIT.

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

Volume A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- Key Function The phone uses the driver's door speaker. acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters. + 0 @ * # & $ £ / % 10 Call volume Call volume is regulated with Key Function Switch between upper and the steering wheel keypad. lower case. space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( ) If the privacy handset* is used, volume is regulated with a wheel on the side of the a b c 2 ä å à æ ç Handling numbers handset. Calling the last number dialled d e f 3 è é Audio system volume The phone automatically stores the last phone Audio system volume is temporarily lowered numbers dialled. during a phone call. Once the call is ended the g h i 4 ì 1. Press ENTER. previous volume is resumed. If the volume is 2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER. regulated during the call, the new level is j k l 5 retained once the call is ended. Sound can also Phone book be automatically muted during a phone call, m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø If the phone book contains a live caller's con- see menu 6.4.3, on page 266. This function tact information then this is shown in the dis- only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys- p q r s 7 ß play. Contact information can be stored on the tem. SIM card and in the phone. Storing contacts in the phone book Entering text t u v 8 ü ù 1. Press MENU. Text is entered using the phone keypad. w x y z 9 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press 1. Press the key with the desired character - ENTER. once for the first character on the button, twice for the second, etc. See table. Pressed briefly if two char- 3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER. acters shall be entered after 4. Enter a name and press ENTER. 2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a each other with the same row are to be entered using the same but- key. 5. Enter a number and press ENTER. ton, press * or wait a few seconds.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and 4. Enter the first few letters of the item and 6. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER. press ENTER, or simply press ENTER. press ENTER, or simply press ENTER. 10 Searching for contacts in the phone book 5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press 7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER. Use the down arrow of the navigation button ENTER. 8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu instead of MENU for direct access to the 6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER. system. Search menu. Erase all contacts Calling using speed dial 1. Press MENU. 1. Press MENU. Briefly press the required keypad button, 2. and press Scroll to Phone book… 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press followed by ENTER. . ENTER ENTER. 3. and press . NOTE Scroll to Search ENTER 3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and 4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER. It takes a short time before speed dialling press ENTER, or simply press ENTER. becomes available after the phone has been If required, enter phone code. The factory-set activated. 5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER. default code is 1234. Copying entries between the SIM card Speed dial To use the speed dial function Speed dial… and Phone book A keypad button (1–9) can be used as a speed must be activated in the Phone book… menu, 1. Press MENU. dial number for a contact in the phone book. see page 268. 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press 1. Press MENU. ENTER. Calling from the phone book 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press 1. Press MENU. 3. Scroll to Copy all… and press ENTER. ENTER. 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press 4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM 3. Scroll to Speed dial… and press ENTER. and press ENTER. ENTER. 4. Scroll to Select numbers and press > All contacts in the phone book memory Deleting contacts from the phone book ENTER. are displayed. The number of contacts 1. Press MENU. 5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for displayed can be reduced by entering 2. Scroll to Phone book… and press the speed dial number and press ENTER. part of the contact's name. ENTER. 3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER. 3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

NOTE SMS - Short Message Service IMEI number To block the phone, you must provide your Press ENTER to dial. Reading SMS 10 network operator with the phone's IMEI num- 1. Press . MENU ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro- NOTE 2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER. grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show this number in the display. Write it down and Hold in the required letter/button in the key- 3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER. pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- keep it in a safe place. responding letter in the phone book. 4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER. > The message text is shown in the dis- Specifications play. Additional selections can be made Functions during a call by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT Output 2 W depressed to leave the menu system. Several functions are available during a call. SIM card Small Some functions can only be used when a call Writing and sending is on hold. Memory entries 250A 1. Press MENU. Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access 2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER. SMS (Short Message Serv- Yes the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol- ice) lowing alternatives: 3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER. Data/Fax No 1. Mute microphone/Microphone on – 4. Enter text and press ENTER. Mute mode. 5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER. Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes 2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or 6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER. A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are resume a call. available on the SIM card. 3. Handsfree/Privacy handset - Use handsfree or the privacy handset*. 4. Phone book – Show phone book. 5. Join – Conference calling (available if more than two parties are connected) 6. Swap – Switch between two calls (available if up to three parties are connected).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265 10 Infotainment system

Menu structure – phone*

Phone menu 2.4. Speed dial… 4.6.2. When busy 1. Call register… 10 2.4.1. Active 4.6.3. Not answered 1.1. Last 10 missed calls 2.4.2. Select numbers 4.6.4. Not reachable 1.2. Last 10 received calls 2.5. Erase SIM 4.6.5. Fax calls 1.3. Last 10 dialled calls 2.6. Erase phone 4.6.6. Data calls 1.4. Erase list… 2.7. Memory status 4.6.7. Cancel all 1.4.1. All calls 3. Messages… 5. Change phone 1.4.2. Missed calls 3.1. Read 5.1. Carphone 1.4.3. Received calls 3.2. Write new 5.2. Add phone 1.4.4. Dialled numbers 3.3. Message settings… 5.3–7. Added phones1 1.5. Call duration… 3.3.1. SMSC number NOTE 1.5.1. Last call 3.3.2. Validity time… The menu above only applies to cars with 1.5.2. Call count 3.3.3. Message type… BluetoothTM handsfree. 1.5.3. Total time 4 Call options… 6. Phone settings… 1.5.4. Reset timers 4.1. Send my number 6.1. Network selection… 2. Phone book… 4.2. Call waiting 6.1.1. Automatic 2.1. Search 4.3. Automatic answer 6.1.2. Manual select 2.2. New contact 4.4. Auto re-dial 6.2. SIM security… 2.3. Copy all… 4.5. Voice mail number 6.2.1. On 2.3.1. SIM to phone 4.6. Diversions… 6.2.2. Off 2.3.2. Phone to SIM 4.6.1. All calls

1 A maximum of 5 phones.

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Menu structure – phone*

6.2.3. Automatic 1.4.1. All calls 2.4. Speed dial 6.3. Edit PIN code 1.4.2. Missed calls A number stored in the phone book can be stored as a speed dial number. 10 6.4. Sounds and volume… 1.4.3. Received calls 2.4.1 Active 6.4.1. Ring volume 1.4.4. Dialled numbers 2.4.2 Select numbers 6.4.2. Ring signals… 1.5. Call duration 6.4.3. Mute radio Duration of all calls or of the most recent call. 2.5. Erase SIM To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4. Erase the entire SIM card memory. 6.4.4. Message beep 2.6. Erase phone 1.5.1. Last call 6.5. IDIS Erase the entire phone memory. 1.5.2. Call count 6.6. Reset phone settings 2.7. Memory status 1.5.3. Total time Shows how many positions are occupied in the 1.5.4. Reset timers SIM card and phone memory. The table shows Description of menu options how many of the total number of positions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250). 1. Call register 2. Phone book 1.1. Last 10 missed 2.1. Search 3. Messages List of missed calls. You can choose to call, Search for a name in the phone book. 3.1. Read erase or store the number in the phone book. 2.2. New contact Received text messages. Select whether to 1.2. Last 10 received Store names and phone numbers in the phone erase, forward, change or save the entire mes- List of received calls. You can choose to call, book, see page 263. sage or parts of it. erase or store the number in the phone book. 2.3. Copy all 3.2. Write new 1.3. Last 10 dialled Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM Write a message using the keypad. Choose List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call, card to the phone memory. whether to save or send it. erase or store the number in the phone book. 2.3.1. SIM to phone 3.3. Message settings 1.4. Erase list Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes- 2.3.2. Phone to SIM Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and sage centre to which messages are to be trans- 1.3 as below. ferred as well as how long they are to be saved at the message centre. Contact your network

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 10 Infotainment system

Menu structure – phone*

operator for information on message settings. 4.6.2 When busy 6.1.2. Manual select Normally, these settings should not be altered. 10 4.6.3. Not answered 6.2. SIM security 3.3.1. SMSC number 4.6.4. Not reachable Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the 3.3.2. Validity time… phone should automatically give the PIN code. 4.6.5. Fax calls 3.3.3. Message type… 6.2.1. On 4.6.6. Data calls 6.2.2. Off 4. Call settings 4.6.7. Cancel all 6.2.3. Automatic 4.1. Send my number 5. Change phone Displays or hides your phone number to/from 6.3. Edit PIN code the person you call. Contact your network 5.1. Car phone Change PIN code. Write down and save the operator regarding ex-directory numbers. Select the built-in phone. code in a safe place. 4.2. Call waiting 5.2. Add phone 6.4. Sounds and volume Be alerted during a phone call that there is Add mobile phones to the list Added phones. 6.4.1. Ring volume another incoming call. 5.3-7. Added phones Adjust the ring tone volume. 4.3. Auto answer Select to connect to one of the added phones 6.4.2. Ring signals… Automatically answers incoming calls. (up to 5 phones). 4.4. Auto redial There are seven different ring tones. Automatically calls a previously engaged num- NOTE 6.4.3. Mute radio ber. The menu above only applies to cars with TM The radio can be switched off/on. 4.5. Voice mail number Bluetooth handsfree. 6.4.4. Message beep Stores voice mail number. 4.6. Call divert 6. Phone settings 6.5. IDIS Choose when and what type of calls are to be 6.1. Selecting network If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming diverted to a specified phone number. Choose a network automatically or manually. calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving situation. 4.6.1. All calls The selected network is shown in the display in the phone's basic mode. 6.6. Reset phone settings This setting only applies during the call in pro- Reset the system's factory settings. gress. 6.1.1. Automatic

268 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

General NOTE One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con- Only a selection of mobile phones are fully nected phone. 10 compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- Connect mobile phone tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or A mobile phone is connected in different ways visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones. depending on whether or not it has been connected previously. To connect a mobile phone for the first time, follow the instructions below: Menus and controls The menus are navigated using the control Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system panel in the centre console (3), see page 261. 1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's Remember manual or www.volvocars.com. The menus are controlled from the centre con- 2. Activate the handsfree function with sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- PHONE. System overview. eral information on menus, see page 266. > Menu option Add phone appears on Mobile phone the display. If one or more mobile Microphone NOTE phones have already been registered If the car is equipped with both then these are also shown. Centre console BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone 3. Select Add phone. then there is an additional menu in the BluetoothTM phone menu, see page 266. > The audio system searches for mobile A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM phones in the vicinity. The search takes can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- approximately 30 seconds. The mobile Activating/deactivating tem. The audio system then works handsfree, phones detected are specified with their A short press on PHONE activates the hands- TM with the option to control a range of the mobile respective Bluetooth name in the dis- free function. The text PHONE at the top of the phone's functions remotely. The microphone is play. The handsfree function's display shows that it is in phone mode. The TM fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone Bluetooth name is shown in the can always be operated by its own keys irre- symbol shows that the handsfree func- mobile phone as My Car. spective of whether or not it is connected. tion is active.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the the mobile phone can be controlled from the NOTE audio system display. audio system. 10 Some mobile phones require that the 5. Enter the number series shown in the audio To call changeover from handsfree is confirmed system display via the mobile phone key- 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown from the phone's keypad. pad. at the top of the display and that the Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system symbol is visible. Making and receiving calls 1. Activate the handsfree function with 2. Dial the number or use the phone book, PHONE. If there is a phone connected, see page 272. Incoming call disconnect the connected phone. Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the 3. Press ENTER. audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. 2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see The call is interrupted with EXIT. Refuse or end with EXIT. the mobile phone's manual. Auto answer 3. Select My Car in the list of units detected Disconnecting the mobile phone The automatic answer function means that in your mobile phone. Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's calls are accepted automatically. Activate/ 4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile range. For more information on connection, deactivate under Phone Menu… Call phone when prompted for the PIN code. see page 271. options… Automatic answer. 5. Select to connect to My Car from the Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- In-call menu mobile phone. vating the handsfree function with one long Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call press on PHONE. The handsfree function is The mobile phone is registered and connected to access the following functions: automatically to the audio system while the text also deactivated when the engine is switched Synchronising appears on the display. For off or when a door is opened1. • Mute microphone - audio system microphone is muted. more information on how mobile phones are When the mobile phone has been discon- registered, see page 271. nected an ongoing call can be continued with • Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- When the connection is established the symbol the mobile phone's built-in microphone and ferred to the mobile phone. is shown and the mobile phone's speaker. BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

1 Applies to Keyless Drive.

270 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

NOTE Ring volume More on registering and connecting Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings… A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg- With certain mobile phones the connection 10 is terminated when the privacy function is Sounds and volume… Ring volume istered. Registration is performed once per used. This is normal. The handsfree function and adjust with / on the navigation but- phone. After registration the mobile phone is in the list of added phones. Not more than one asks if you want to reconnect. ton. mobile phone can be connected at a time. Phones can be deregistered under Phone • Phone book – searching in the phone Ring signals book. The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone. nals that can be selected under Phone Menu… Phone settings… Sounds and Automatic connection NOTE When the handsfree function is active and the volume… Ring signals… Ring signal 1 A new call cannot be started during an last mobile phone connected is in range it is ongoing call. etc. connected automatically. When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its NOTE name is shown in the display. To change over Audio settings The connected mobile phone's ring signal is to manual connection of another phone, press EXIT. Call volume not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used. Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use Manual connection the steering wheel keypad. If you want to connect a mobile phone other In order to select the connected phone's ring than the last connected or change the con- Audio system volume 2 signal , go to Phone Menu… Phone nected mobile phone, proceed as follows: In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol- settings… Sounds and volume… Ring ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME. Set the audio system in phone mode signals… Use mobile phone signal. (PHONE) and follow the instructions on the The audio source can be automatically muted display or change the connected mobile phone for incoming calls under Phone Menu… by using the menu system as described below. Phone settings… Sounds and volume… The menu structure is available in two variants Mute radio. depending on whether the car only has

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-in NOTE NOTE phone. 10 If the mobile phone does not support copy- Only a selection of mobile phones are fully • For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec- ing of the phone book then List is empty is compatible with the voice recognition function is made under Phone Menu… shown when copying is finished. tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an Bluetooth… Change phone Add authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on phone or select one of the previously con- If the phone book contains a ringing caller's compatible phones. nected phones. contact information then this is shown in the For cars with built-in phone and display. • Voice mail number BluetoothTM the connection is made under Searching for contacts The number to the voice mail is changed under Phone Menu… Change phone Add The easiest way to search in the phone book is Call options… Voice mail number. If no phone or select one of the previously con- with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts nected phones. number is stored then this menu is reached a search in the phone book based on the key's with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time first letter. to use the stored number. Phonebook The phone book can also be reached with / All use of the phone book presupposes that the Call lists text PHONE is shown at the top of the display on the navigation button or with / on The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- and that the symbol is visible. the steering wheel keypad. The search can also tion at each new connection and are then be performed from the phone book's Search updated during the connection. Press ENTER The audio system stores a copy of the phone menu under Phone book… Search: to show the last dialled. Other call lists are book from each registered mobile phone. The available under Call register…. phone book is copied automatically to the 1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER. audio system during each connection. Deacti- NOTE vate the function under Phone settings… 2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to Certain mobile phones show a list of the last Synchronise phone book. Searching for con- call. dialled numbers in reverse order. tacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone's phone book. Voice recognition The mobile phone's voice recognition function Inputting text for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER. Input text using the keypad in the centre console. Press once for the key's first character,

272 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree* twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for 3. Bluetooth… Menu structure - BluetoothTM more characters, see the table on page 263. handsfree with built-in phone 3.1. Change phone 10 A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- 1. Call register… 3.1.1. Add phone acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input 1.1. Last 10 missed calls characters. / on the navigation button 3.1.2–6.Added phones3 1.2. Last 10 received calls scrolls between the characters. 3.2. Remove phone 1.3. Last 10 dialled calls 3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone Menu structure - BluetoothTM 2. Phone book… 3.4. Car Bluetooth info handsfree 2.1. Search 4. Call options… 2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone NOTE 4.1. Automatic answer 3. Bluetooth… The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree is 4.2. Voice mail number available in two variants. For cars with only 3.1. Remove phone BluetoothTM handsfree and for cars with 5. Phone settings… TM 3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone built-in phone and Bluetooth handsfree. 5.1. Sounds and volume… 3.3. Car Bluetooth info 5.1.1. Ring volume 1. Call register… 4. Call options… 5.1.2. Ring signals… 1.1. Last 10 missed calls 4.1. Automatic answer 5.1.3. Mute radio 1.2. Last 10 received calls 4.2. Voice mail number 5.2. Synchronise phone book 1.3. Last 10 dialled calls 5. Change phone 2. Phone book… 5.1. Carphone 2.1. Search 5.2. Add phone 2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone 5.3–7. Added phones3

3 A maximum of 5 phones.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 273 10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

6. Phone settings…

10 6.1. Sounds and volume… 6.1.1. Ring volume 6.1.2. Ring signals… 6.1.3. Mute radio 6.2. Synchronise phone book

274 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Infotainment system

275 Type designation...... 278 Dimensions and weights...... 280 Engine specifications...... 283 Engine oil...... 284 Fluids and lubricants...... 286 Fuel...... 289 Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ...... 290 Electrical system...... 292 Type approval...... 294 Symbols in the display...... 295

276 SPECIFICATIONS 11 Specifications

Type designation

278 11 Specifications

Type designation

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle NOTE identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding The labels shown in the owner's manual are the car and when ordering spare parts and not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show accessories. their approximate appearance and location Type designation, vehicle identification in the car. The information that applies to number, maximum permissible weights, your car in particular is available on the label 11 in question in your car. codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. S40 and V50: The label is visible when the right rear door is opened. C30 and C70: The label is visible when the right door is opened. Label for parking heater. Engine code, component and serial numbers. Label for engine oil. Gearbox type designation and serial number: manual gearbox , automatic gearbox VIN number (type and model year designation plus chassis number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

279 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Dimensions

Dimensions mm Dimensions mm Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2640 G Front track 1548A J Width 1770 B Length 4522 1535B K Width including door mirrors 2022

C Load length, floor, folded seat 1766 H Rear track 1544A A with 15" wheel B with 16" and 17" wheels B D Load length, floor 989 1531

E Load height 685 I Load width, floor 1002

F Height 1457

280 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Weights WARNING Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank The car's driving characteristics change 90% full and all fluids. depending on how heavily it is loaded and The weight of passengers and accessories, how the load is distributed. and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the payload and is not 11 included in the kerb weight. Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

NOTE The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the accessory. For decal location, see page 278. Examples of accessories that reduce load- Max. total weight ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other Max. train weight (car+trailer) accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, Max. front axle load GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- Max. rear axle load pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc. Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- Equipment level taining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 75 kg.

281 11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg) 1.6 1200 50

D2 1300 75 11 2.0F 1350 75

2.0 1350 75

others 1500 75

Engine Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg) 1.6, 2.0 and 2.0F 650 50

others 700 50

282 11 Specifications

Engine specifications

Overview Engine Engine Output Output Torque (Nm/ No. of Bore Stroke Swept Com- code (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) rpm) cylinders (mm) (mm) volume pression (litres) ratio 1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1,596 11.0:1 11 2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1,999 10.8:1

2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1,999 10.8:1

T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 – 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 278.

283 11 Specifications

Engine oil

Adverse driving conditions Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. Viscosity chart Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. IMPORTANT Below are some examples of adverse driving In order to fulfil the requirements for the conditions. engine's service intervals all engines are Check the oil level more frequently for long filled with a specially adapted synthetic 11 engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil journeys: has been made very carefully with regard to • towing a caravan or trailer service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. • in mountainous regions at high speeds An approved engine oil must be used in • order that the recommended service inter- • in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed ter than +40 °C grade of oil for both filling and oil change, The above also apply to shorter driving dis- otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption tances at low temperatures. and environmental impact. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- driving conditions. It provides extra protection ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed for the engine. grade and viscosity is not used.

284 11 Specifications

Engine oil

Engine oil grade

Engine variant Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter (litres) 1.6 B4164S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 4.0 11 2.0F B4204S4 Viscosity: SAE 5W–30 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 4.3

D2 D4162T 3.8

T5A B5254T7 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 5.8

D3 D5204T5 Viscosity: SAE 0W-30/5W–30 5.9

D4 D5204T 5.9

A SAE 0W-30 applies for Europe, SAE 5W-30 applies for other markets

For filling engine oil, see page 218.

285 11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

Overview

IMPORTANT The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. 11 If the transmission is topped up with a different fluid, contact a workshop nearby for servicing. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Gearbox oil Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M

B6 1.6

MTX75 1.8 BOT 350M3

M66 1.9

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

286 11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

Fluids Fluid System Volume Recommended oil grade (litres)

Coolant 1.6 5.8 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostat starts opening at: 2.0 and 2.0F 6.5 11 petrol engine (1.6) 82 °C, T5, automatic 7.5 petrol engines 90 °C, gearbox diesel engines 82 °C D2 6.2 diesel engine (D2) 83 °C D3 and D4 8.5

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a) Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steer- Power steering 1.0 – 1.2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifications. ing fluid

Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Die- 4.0 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water for temperatures below sel freezing.

5-cyl. Petrol/Die- 6.5 sel

287 11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

Fluid System Volume Recommended oil grade (litres) Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0, approx. 55 2.0F Petrol: see page 147

11 Petrol: T5 approx. 62 Diesel: D2 approx. 52 Diesel: see page 148 Diesel: D3 and D4 approx. 60

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

288 11 Specifications

Fuel

Fuel consumption See further information and more advice on There are several causes that can affect fuel pages 14 and 144. consumption negatively. Examples of this are: See page 146 for general information on fuel. • The driver's driving style • If the customer has specified wheels larger than those fitted as standard on the mod- 11 el's basic version, then resistance increases. • High speed results in increased wind resistance • Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car. Even a combination of the above-mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption.

To bear in mind Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce consumption: • Drive gently and avoid unnecessary acceleration as well as braking too hard. • Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results. • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.

289 11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

Approved tyre pressures Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load (km/h) Front (kPa) A Rear Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB (kPa)

11 0–160 210 210 270 270 270 195/65 R15 160+ 250 210 280 260 -

D2 0–160 210 210 250 250 250 205/55 R16 DRIVe 160+ 250 210 280 260 -

0–160 220 220 250 250 250 205/50 R17 160+ 260 220 280 260 -

195/65 R15 0–160 210 210 250 250 250 1.6 205/55 R16 160+ 250 210 280 260 - 2.0 205/50 R17 0–160 220 220 250 250 250 2.0F 215/45 R18C 160+ 260 220 280 260 -

0–160 210 210 250 250 250 205/55 R16 160+ 260 210 280 260 - T5 205/50 R17 0–160 220 220 250 250 250

215/45 R18 160+ 270 220 290 270 -

290 11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load (km/h) Front (kPa) A Rear Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB (kPa) 205/55 R16 0–160 230 220 250 250 250 D3 205/50 R17 11 D4 160+ 270 220 290 270 - 215/45 R18

Temporary Spare Tyre 0–80 420 420 420 420 -

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B Economical driving, see page 194. C The 1.6 cannot be specified with this tyre.

291 11 Specifications

Electrical system

General The battery capacity is dependent upon the capacity as the original battery (see the label The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter on the battery). The electrical system is single-pole and uses battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. that you switch to a battery with the same

11 Battery

Voltage (V) Cold start capacity, Reserve capacity Capacity (Ah) CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A) (minutes) 590 100 60 12 760 A 120 70

12 700 B 135 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

Bulbs Lighting Output (W) Type Dipped beam, cars with halogen lamps 55 H7

Main beam, cars with halogen lamps 55 H9

Main beam, cars with Dual Xenon or ABL (Active Bending Lights) 55 H7

Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 P21W

Front direction indicators, cars with Dual Xenon or halogen, rear direction indicators 21 PY21W

292 11 Specifications

Electrical system

Lighting Output (W) Type Front direction indicators, cars with ABL (Active Bending Lights) 24 PY24WSW

Rear position/parking and side marker lamps (upper socket) 5 P21/5W

Rear position/parking lamps (lower socket) 5 R5W 11 Cargo area lighting, number plate lighting 5 C5W

Vanity mirror* 1.2 Tubular lamp

Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W5W

Fog lamps 35 H8

Glovebox lighting 3 Tubular lamp

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293 11 Specifications

Type approval

Remote control key system Certification of the Keyless Drive system Country and region Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies that this equipment type 5WK4 8952, A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, 5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the E, EST, F, FIN, GB, Delphi hereby essential characteristic requirements and other 11 GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, certifies that this relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC. LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, remote control key SK, SLO system conforms to the essential char- IS, LI, N, CH acteristic require- HR ments and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151

ETC093LPD0155

294 11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

General Symbols in the display Symbol Meaning Page There are a variety of different symbols in the Indicator and warning symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into Stability sys- 55, 167, 168 warning, indicator and information symbols. combined instrument panel tem, STC or Shown below are the most common symbols Symbol Meaning Page DSTC* with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. Warning 21, 32, 54, 11 Engine pre- 55 For more information on symbols and text 57, 163 heater (diesel) messages, see pages 54 and 58. The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could Information 54, 57, 163, affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. 168, 170 Low level in 55 An explanatory text is shown on the informa- fuel tank tion display at the same time. The yellow information symbol illumi- Emissions 54, 55 nates, in combination with text in the informa- system Indicator sym- 56 tion display, when a deviation in any of the car's bol for trailer systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination Fault in the 55, 56 with other symbols. ABS system Parking brake 56 applied

Rear fog lamp 55 Airbags - SRS 21, 56

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 295 11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

Symbol Meaning Page Symbol Meaning Page Information symbols in the centre console display Low oil pres- 54, 56 Left direction 53 Symbol Meaning Page sure indicators Surround sound (only 248 Premium Sound) 11 Seatbelt 18, 56 Right direction 53 G021216 reminder indicators News 252

G021221

Alternator not 56 Other information symbols in the Programme types 252 charging combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page G021222 Regional radio pro- 253 Fault in brake 56, 165 Rain sensor* 69 grammes system

G021223

Cruise control* 71 Audio files 255 Main beam 53 Directory in CD disc 255 indicator

Gear shift indicator* 159 Traffic information 252

G021220

Phone* 269

BluetoothTM hands- 269 free*

296 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

Information symbols in the roof console display Symbol Meaning Page Seatbelt reminder 19

Airbag, passenger 24, 25 seat, activated

Airbag, passenger 25 seat, deactivated

297 12 Alphabetical Index

A Air quality system, ECC...... 98 Automatic car washes...... 206 Air vents...... 93 Automatic gearbox A/C Alarm...... 138 manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 160 electronic climate control...... 99 alarm indicator...... 138 towing and recovery...... 174 manual climate control...... 94, 95 arming...... 138 trailer...... 177, 178 ABS fault...... 55, 165 automatic alarm activation...... 139 Automatic locking...... 135 Active Bending Lights (ABL)...... 63 deactivating a triggered alarm...... 139 Automatic relocking...... 134 disarming...... 138 Active headlamps...... 63 Autostart...... 154 RDS traffic warning...... 252 Adaptation...... 157 12 reduced alarm level...... 139 Auto volume control...... 249 Additional heater (Diesel)...... 104 testing the alarm system...... 139 Auxiliary heater...... 104 Adjusting headlamp pattern...... 186 Alcolock...... 150 Average fuel consumption...... 66 halogen headlamp...... 186 Antenna location, Keyless drive...... 132 AF – automatic frequency update...... 253 Approach light, duration...... 80 Airbag...... 22 setting...... 85 B activating/deactivating, PACOS...... 24 Audio, see also Sound...... 246 driver's and front passenger side...... 23 Backrest key switch off...... 24 Audio volume front seat, lowering...... 109 phone...... 263, 271 AIRBAG ...... 22 Backrest rear seat, lowering...... 118 phone/media player...... 271 Bag holder...... 123 Airbag system...... 22 programme types...... 254 Air conditioning...... 94 ring signal, phone...... 271 Bass speaker...... 247 ECC...... 97 Auto Battery...... 226, 292 general...... 92 climate control settings...... 97 changing the battery in the remote control key...... 133 Air distribution...... 100 AUTO maintenance...... 215, 226 ECC...... 98 storing stations...... 250 overload...... 145 Air distribution, A/C...... 95 Auto climate...... 97

298 12 Alphabetical Index

specifications...... 292 Bulb holder Catalytic converter...... 147 start assistance...... 176 removal...... 231 recovery...... 174 symbols on the battery...... 226 Bulbs CD discs Bioethanol E85...... 147 changing...... 228 storage compartment...... 116 Blind spot (BLIS)...... 171 Bulbs, see Lighting...... 228, 292 CD functions...... 255 Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 81, 171 Checking and topping up the coolant..... 222 Bluetooth C Checking the engine oil level...... 218 handsfree...... 269 Checks mute microphone...... 270 Calls fluids and oils...... 219 12 transfer call to mobile...... 270 functions during a call...... 262, 265 Children...... 33 Bonnet, opening...... 216 incoming...... 270 child safety locks...... 40, 137 Booster cushion operation...... 262, 270 child seats and side airbags...... 26 folding up...... 39 volume in phone...... 263 location in the car...... 33 lowering...... 40 Car care...... 206 location in the car, table...... 34 safety...... 33 Booster cushion, integrated...... 39 Car care, leather upholstery...... 208 Child safety locks...... 137 Brake and clutch fluid...... 223 Cargo area...... 120 Brake light...... 64 cargo cover...... 121, 122 Child seat...... 33 Brakes lighting...... 112 Child seats...... 33 anti-lock braking system, ABS...... 165 loading...... 185 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 40 brake light...... 64 safety grille...... 120 size classes for child seats with the ISO- Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 166 safety net...... 120, 122 FIX fixture system...... 41 emergency brake lights...... 166 Cargo cover...... 121, 122 upper mounting points for child seats.. 44 handbrake...... 75 Car settings...... 85 Cigarette lighter socket front seat...... 60 Brake system...... 165 Car upholstery...... 208 Car wash...... 206

299 12 Alphabetical Index

Cleaning Coolant...... 222 Driving automatic car washes...... 206 Cooling system...... 144 cooling system...... 144 car wash...... 206 economical...... 144 Crash, see Collision...... 32 rims...... 206 in water...... 144 seatbelts...... 209 Cruise control...... 71 slippery driving conditions...... 145 upholstery...... 208 with trailer...... 177 Climate control D Driving in water...... 144 general...... 92 Driving with a trailer personal preferences...... 84 Deadlocks...... 135 towball load...... 281 12 Climate control settings deactivation...... 135 towing capacity...... 281 auto...... 97 temporary deactivation...... 135 DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 167 Clock, adjustment...... 84 Defroster...... 95 DSTC, see also Stability system Clutch fluid, checking & topping up...... 223 Diesel...... 148 symbol...... 55 Coat hanger...... 115 Diesel: engine preheater...... 55 During a call, functions...... 265 Cold start...... 162 Diesel particle filter...... 148 automatic gearbox...... 162 Dipstick, electronic...... 220 Collision E Direction indicators...... 65 crash mode...... 32 ECC, electronic climate control...... 93 inflatable curtain, IC...... 28 Disc text...... 256 Economical driving...... 144 Colour code, paint...... 210 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 162 ECO pressure...... 194 Combined instrument panel...... 53 Display, messages...... 58 table...... 194, 290 Compass...... 78 Display lighting...... 63 Electrical socket calibration...... 78 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II...... 245, 248 cargo area...... 123 setting the zone...... 78 Door mirrors...... 80 centre console...... 60 Condensation in headlamps...... 206 Driver's door control panel...... 52, 76 rear seat...... 60

300 12 Alphabetical Index

Electrical system...... 292 Error messages in BLIS...... 172 Frequency update, automatic...... 253 Emergency calls...... 260 Expectant mothers, seatbelt...... 19 Front seats, heated...... 95 Emergency equipment External dimensions...... 280 FSC, environmental labelling...... 14 warning triangle...... 195 Extra mats...... 110 Fuel

Emergency puncture repair...... 199 CO2 emissions...... 289 Emission control consumption...... 289 fault indicator...... 55 F fuel consumption, display...... 66 fuel economy...... 194 Engine block heater...... 156 Fan fuel filter...... 148 fuel-driven...... 101 12 A/C...... 94 level indicator...... 55 Engine compartment...... 216 ECC...... 97 parking heater...... 101 coolant...... 222 Fast-wind...... 256 refuelling...... 146 oil...... 218 Fuses...... 234 power steering fluid...... 223 First aid equipment...... 196 box in the engine compartment...... 235 Flexifuel...... 156 Engine oil...... 218, 219, 284 changing...... 234 adaptation...... 157 adverse driving conditions...... 284 general...... 234 capacities...... 284 Floor mats...... 110 relay/fuse box in the passenger com- filter...... 218 Fluids, capacities...... 286 partment...... 238 oil grade...... 284 Fluids and oils...... 218, 286 oil pressure...... 56 Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart- Engine specifications...... 283 ment...... 218 G Entry, keyless...... 85 Fluids and oils general...... 218 Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's Gearbox Fog lamps manual...... 14 manual...... 159 rear...... 63 EON - Enhanced Other Networks...... 254 Gear selector assistance (GSI - Gear shift Fog lamps, on/off...... 63 indicator)...... 159 Equalizer...... 248 Fold down the rear seat backrest ...... 118

301 12 Alphabetical Index

Gear selector inhibitor...... 161 I J Geartronic...... 160 IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys- Jack...... 195 General information on fuel...... 146 tem...... 260 Glovebox...... 115 Ignition keys...... 155 locking...... 128 IMEI number...... 265 K Gross vehicle weight...... 281 Immobiliser...... 126, 155 GSI - Gear shift indicator...... 159 Kerb weight...... 281 Inflatable Curtain...... 28 Key 12 Information display...... 58 keyless lock and ignition system...... 130 H Information on fuel...... 146 remote control key...... 126 Infotainment system Key blade...... 127, 131 Handbrake...... 75 menus...... 244 active locks...... 129 Hazard warning flashers...... 74 Inlaid mats...... 110 Keyless drive...... 130, 158, 294 Headlamp pattern adjustment starting the car...... 158 Instrument lighting...... 63 Active Bending Lights (ABL) ...... 186 Keyless entry...... 85 Instrument overview Headlamps...... 62 left-hand drive...... 48 Keyless start (keyless drive)...... 130 Head restraint...... 118 right-hand drive...... 50 Keypad in the steering wheel...... 71, 73, 261 Heating Integrated booster cushion...... 39 Key positions...... 154 front seats...... 95, 99 Interior lighting, see Lighting...... 111 Kick-down rearview and door mirrors...... 95, 99 automatic gearbox...... 161 rear window...... 95, 99 Interior rearview mirror...... 78 automatic dimming...... 78 High-pressure headlamp washing...... 68 Intermittent wiping...... 68 HomeLink ...... 87 iPod, connection...... 246 Home safe lighting...... 65, 80 setting...... 85 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats...... 40

302 12 Alphabetical Index

L fog lamp...... 231 M front...... 228 Lambda-sond...... 147 main beam halogen...... 229 Main/dipped beam, see Lightning...... 62 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 208 number plate lighting...... 232 Main beam parking lamps...... 230 Lighting flashing...... 65 position lamps...... 230 Active Xenon headlamps...... 63 Main beam "flash"...... 65 rear lamp...... 232 approach light, duration...... 80 side marker lamps...... 230 Maintenance...... 215 automatic lighting...... 112 vanity mirror...... 233 rustproofing...... 211 automatic lighting, dipped beam...... 62 self-maintenance...... 215 bulbs, specifications...... 292 Loading 12 Making calls...... 262, 270 cargo area...... 112 general...... 185 dipped beam...... 62 load capacity...... 185 Manual gearbox...... 159 display lighting...... 63 load retaining eyelets...... 122 GSI - Gear shift indicator...... 159 front fog lamps...... 63 Load retaining eyelets...... 122 towing and recovery...... 174 headlamp levelling...... 62 Locking...... 131 Manual gear positions (Geartronic)...... 160 home safe lighting...... 65, 80 unlocking...... 134 Max. roof load ...... 281 in passenger compartment...... 111 Locking/unlocking...... 134 Memory function in seats...... 109 lighting panel, passenger compart- inside...... 134 ment...... 62 Menus outside...... 134 main/dipped beam...... 62, 65 audio system...... 244 position/parking lamps...... 62 Locks Menu structure...... 84 reading lamps...... 111 locking...... 134 media player...... 258 rear fog lamp...... 63 Lubricants...... 286 phone, menu options...... 267 Lighting, bulb replacement...... 228 Lubricants, capacities...... 286 phone, overview...... 266 cargo area...... 233 Messages in BLIS...... 172 dipped beam...... 229 Messages in the information display...... 58 direction indicators...... 230

303 12 Alphabetical Index

Meters in the combined instrument panel O Passenger compartment heater fuel gauge...... 53 fuel-driven...... 101 outside temperature gauge...... 53 Oil, see also Engine oil...... 219, 284 Personal preferences...... 84 speedometer...... 53 Oil level low...... 218 approach light, duration...... 85 tachometer...... 53 One-key dial...... 264 auto blower adjust...... 84 trip meter...... 53 automatic locking...... 85 Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 14 Misting doors unlock...... 85 attending to the windows...... 92 Oxyhydrogen gas...... 176 home safe lighting...... 85 condensation in headlamps...... 206 keyless entry...... 85 12 rear window...... 95 lock confirm. light...... 85 removing with defroster function.... 95, 98 P recirculation timer...... 84 timer function...... 95, 98 unlock confirm. light...... 85 PACOS...... 24 Mobile phone Petrol grade...... 147 PACOS, switch...... 24 connect...... 271 Phone handsfree...... 269 Paintwork calling from the phone book...... 264 register phone...... 269 colour code...... 210 connect...... 271 Mounting points (child seat)...... 44 damage and touch-up...... 210 controls...... 261 Parking assistance...... 169 entering text...... 263 parking assistance sensors...... 170 handsfree...... 269 incoming calls...... 270 N Parking brake...... 56, 75 making calls...... 270 Parking heater News...... 252 on/off...... 262 battery and fuel...... 101 one-key dial...... 264 general...... 101 phone book...... 272 parking on a hill...... 101 phone book, shortcut...... 272 symbols and display messages...... 102 receiving a call...... 270 time setting...... 103 register phone...... 269 Passenger compartment filter...... 92

304 12 Alphabetical Index

standby, standby mode...... 262 R Recommended child seats ...... 33 traffic safety...... 261 Reduced guard Phone book Radio settings...... 85 EON...... 254 handling numbers...... 263 Refrigerant...... 92 frequency update...... 253 Phone system...... 260 news...... 252 Refuelling Pinch protection, sunroof...... 83 programme types...... 251 fuel cap...... 146 Polishing...... 207 radio settings...... 250 fuel filler flap, electrical opening...... 146 refuelling...... 146 Power seat...... 108 radio stations...... 250 REG...... 253 Refusing a call...... 262 Powershift gearbox...... 162, 174 12 Radio text...... 253 REG - Regional radio programmes...... 253 Power steering fluid, checking and topping up...... 223 Rain sensor...... 69 Relay/fuse box: see Fuses...... 234 Power sunroof...... 82 Random, CD and audio files...... 256 Remote control...... 126 replacing the battery...... 133 Power windows...... 76 RDS functions...... 251 blocking...... 77 resetting...... 254 Remote control, HomeLink passenger seat...... 77 Reading lamps, see Lighting...... 111 programmable ...... 87 rear seat...... 77 Rear seat ...... 118 Remote control key...... 155 battery replacement...... 133 Programme type...... 253 Rearview and door mirrors detachable key blade...... 127 PTY – Programme type...... 252 automatic retracting/extending...... 80, 85 functions...... 126 Puncture, see Tyres...... 195, 197 compass...... 78 door...... 80 Remote control key system, type appro- Putting calls on hold...... 262 electrically retractable...... 80 val...... 294 interior...... 78 Resetting the door mirrors...... 80 Recirculation Reverse gear inhibitor...... 159 A/C...... 94 Rims ECC...... 98 cleaning...... 206

305 12 Alphabetical Index

Roof load, max. weight ...... 281 Side airbag SIPS...... 26 Steering wheel Rustproofing...... 211 SIM card...... 260 cruise control...... 71 keypad...... 71, 73, 261 SIPS bags...... 26 steering wheel adjustment...... 74 SMS...... 265 Stone chips and scratches...... 210 S read...... 265 write...... 265 Storage compartment...... 114 Safety CD discs...... 116 safety systems, table...... 31 Soot filter...... 58, 149 Storage spaces in the passenger compart- Soot filter full...... 149 Safety grille...... 120 ment...... 114 12 Sound Safety net...... 120, 122 Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 250 audio settings...... 246, 247 Scan audio source...... 246 Subwoofer...... 247 CD and audio files...... 256 volume...... 246 Sunroof...... 82 radio stations...... 251 Spare wheel...... 195 opening and closing...... 82, 83 Seatbelt temporary spare...... 193, 195 pinch protection...... 83 pregnancy...... 19 sunscreen...... 83 Spin control...... 167 seatbelt tensioner...... 20 ventilation position...... 82 SRS system Seatbelt reminder...... 19 Sunscreen, sunroof...... 83 general...... 22 Seatbelts...... 18 Surround...... 245, 248 Stability and traction control system...... 167 Seats Symbols...... 168 Stains...... 208 head restraints, rear...... 118 indicator symbols...... 55, 56 lowering the front backrest...... 109 Standby, phone...... 262 warning symbols...... 54 lowering the rear backrest...... 118 Start assistance...... 176 Symbols and display messages manual setting...... 108 Starting the engine...... 154 parking heater...... 102 power seat...... 108 keyless drive...... 130, 158 Service programme...... 214 Steering lock...... 154 Side airbags...... 26

306 12 Alphabetical Index

T removing...... 183 U specifications...... 180 Tailgate Towing eye...... 175 Unlocking...... 131, 134 driving with open tailgate...... 145 settings...... 85 TP – Traffic information...... 252 locking/unlocking...... 126, 134 Upper mounting points, child seat...... 44 Traffic information...... 252 Tank volume...... 286 USB, connection...... 246 Trailer...... 177 Technical data, engine...... 283 cable...... 179 Temperature Trip computer...... 66 actual temperature...... 93 V 12 passenger compartment, electronic cli- Tuning Radio...... 250 mate control...... 99 Type approval, remote control key sys- Ventilation...... 93 passenger compartment, manual cli- tem...... 294 Vibration damper...... 179 mate control...... 96 Type designation...... 278 Volume Testing the alarm system...... 139 Tyres audio system...... 246 Timer direction of rotation...... 193 auto volume control...... 249 A/C...... 95 driving characteristics...... 190 media player...... 246 ECC...... 98 general...... 190 Tools...... 195 maintenance...... 190 pressure...... 194, 290 W Total airing function...... 134 puncture repair...... 199 Towbar, see Towing equipment...... 179 specifications...... 190 Warning lamp Towing...... 174 speed ratings...... 190 stability and traction control system. . 167 towing eye...... 175 tread wear indicators...... 191 Warning symbol, airbag system...... 21 winter tyres...... 193 Towing capacity...... 281 Warning triangle...... 195 Towing equipment...... 179 Washer fluid, filling...... 221 installation...... 181

307 12 Alphabetical Index

Washers Wiper blades...... 224 headlamps...... 68 cleaning...... 224 rear window...... 69 replacing, rear window...... 224 washer fluid, filling...... 221 replacing, windscreen...... 224 windscreen...... 68 Water and dirt-repellent coating...... 81 Water-repellent surface, cleaning...... 207 Waxing...... 207

12 Weights kerb weight...... 281 Wheels changing...... 197 installation...... 198 removal...... 197 rims...... 192 snow chains...... 192 spare wheel...... 195 Whiplash injury...... 29 WHIPS child seat/booster cushion...... 29 whiplash injury...... 29 Windscreen wipers...... 68 rain sensor...... 69 Winter tyres...... 193 Wiper rear window...... 69

308